Anda di halaman 1dari 488

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual


How to Use PDF Manual
FCR PRIMA T SERIES

Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation

Search the error code. Installation Specifications


Abnormal image occurs. Preparation for Installation
Bootup does not take place, and the panel LED remains Installation Procedures (Mechanical)
as “ ”. Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Procedures for Changing the RU IP Address
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Procedures for Changing the IP Address of the FTP Server
Installing Optional Items (Anti-Drop Retainer)
Software Control Installing Optional Items (Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon)
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection Check) When Installed in Patient Environment
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
SND37A Board LEDs Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
CPU37A Board LEDs
Unit Locations Preventive Maintenance Programs
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts:
2nd-Year / 4th-Year
Image Data Flows
Procedures
Voltage Check

Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints

Sensitivity/Shading Correction Install/version update software and applications.


Format Adjustment Back up/restore machine-specific data.
Back up/restore configuration data.
RU PC-TOOL
Parts Related Checkpoints
MUTL
Parts List (INDEX)

-1-
To GUIDE PAGE

CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE


FCR PRIMA T SERIES

Features of the Client PC Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations


List of CLIENT PC-TOOL Commands Operation in ON-LINE Mode
Operation in OFF-LINE Mode
Precautions in Using the Client PC

Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD-ROM


Data Flow of Commands
Drive
UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
Precautions in Setting the “Windows Firewall”
in Console READ and WRITE
Import and Export
Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options”
in Client PC

Maintenance

Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL


Acquisition of Log Information
Check/Acquisition of History Data
Check/Acquisition of Configuration Data
MUTL
Version Update

-2-
How to Use PDF Manual
Hyperlinks
A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored " " mark in this manual.
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section.

- Example of Hyperlink -
{MC:3.1_Front Cover}

Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.

-3-
BLANK PAGE

-4-
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

FCR PRIMA T SERIES


CR-IR 392
Service Manual

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the


unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg

FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2011-2012 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval


system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 020-233-04E
1st Edition - Aug. 09, 2011
Revised Edition - Dec. 01, 2012

2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo


Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1

1. Handling of this Manual 1.2 Precautions for Handling of this Manual

1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.


1.1 About this Manual
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel
authorized by FUJIFILM Corporation.
n Scope
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation,
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 392. The machine is
categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should
be taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this
n Notation of Unit Symbols manual.
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI)
are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of
the SI, are used in some cases. FUJIFILM Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of
this manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service
personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product.
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to
improvements on the product.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.1


0.2
1.3 About Notation in the Manual n Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component removed
n Notation of Cautions, Warnings, etc. is to be reinstalled.
The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "instruction", "note", and "reference" are shown CHECK This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
below. the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
WARNING " Check/Adjustment Procedures."
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed. - Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
CAUTION improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction
- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied to
is not observed.
screw sections of installed parts/components.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or
Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
difficult-to-recover trouble).

u INSTRUCTION u
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if the
instruction is not observed. That Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
u NOTE u have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure. If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
REFERENCE Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools.

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration


n Indication of Refer To
Name Inspection Calibration
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below. Dosimeter - 
{MC:5.1_Cassette ejection sensor (SA4)} Steel rule (150 mm)  -
Steel rule (300 mm)  -
n Notation in the Manual
Digital multimeter  
In this Service Manual, the CR-IR 392 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU (Reader
Unit), the FM-DL100 as the Printer, and the CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 355CL/CR-IR348CL as the Calipers  () -
Console. : A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.2


Contents Safety Precaution 0.3
CR-IR 392 Service Manual - Contents

Safety Precaution

1. Safety Precautions............................................ Safety-1 3. Protective Housings against


1.1 General Precautions..............................................................Safety-1 Laser Exposure................................................Safety-11
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation.....................................Safety-2
1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment......................................Safety-2 4. CLASSIFICATION............................................ Safety-12
1.3.1 Additional Protective Grounding....................................................Safety-2 5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves............ Safety-13
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine....................................Safety-3 5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)...................................Safety-13
1.5 Notes on Additional Stand for LCD Use.................................Safety-3 5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2/EN60601-1-2.............Safety-13
1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where
the Additional Stand for LCD Is Used............................................Safety-3 6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS.................... Safety-16
1.5.2 Cautions in Using the Additional Stand for LCD............................Safety-3
7. Cautions on Network...................................... Safety-17
1.5.3 Precautions in
Preventing the Additional Stand for LCD from Toppling................Safety-3

2. Labels................................................................. Safety-4
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels........................................................Safety-4
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations..............................Safety-4
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels.....................................................Safety-5
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels.......................................................Safety-6
2.3 Chinese Label.......................................................................Safety-7
2.4 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations...........Safety-8
2.4.1 Scanning Optics Unit.....................................................................Safety-8
2.4.2 Covers...........................................................................................Safety-8
2.4.3 Power Cable Caution Label (USA Only).......................................Safety-9
2.4.4 Dummy Cassette (For Mobile)......................................................Safety-9
2.5 Safety and Symbols............................................................Safety-10

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.3


Contents Safety Precaution 0.4

Product Specifications

1. Specifications of the Machine.............................Spec-1


1.1 Product Code..........................................................................Spec-1
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types...................................................Spec-1
1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes........................................Spec-1
1.4 Optional Item/Available Item Components................................Spec-2
1.5 Product Specifications.............................................................Spec-2
1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity..............................Spec-3
1.7 Moving Means for the Machine................................................Spec-3
1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine.............................................Spec-4
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine by Use of the Anti-Drop Retainer................Spec-4
1.9 Environmental Conditions........................................................Spec-5
1.10 Electrical Specifications...........................................................Spec-5
1.11 Servicing Space......................................................................Spec-6
1.12 Installation Space....................................................................Spec-7
1.12.1 Installting the Machine on the Table................................................Spec-7
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Drop Retainer...........................Spec-8
1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used......Spec-8
1.12.4 Using the Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon...................Spec-9
1.13 Disposal................................................................................Spec-10
1.13.1 Disposal of IP................................................................................Spec-10

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.4


Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.5

Machine Description (MD)

1. Machine Overview...................................................MD-1 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations.................MD-12


1.1 Features.................................................................................... MD-1 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function.................... MD-12
1.2 System Configuration................................................................ MD-1 3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit and
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names............. MD-2 the Components to Be Protected.................................................... MD-12
1.3.1 External View of Machine.................................................................. MD-2 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected.................................. MD-12
1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions............................................................ MD-2 3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram................................ MD-13
1.4 Machine Components................................................................ MD-4 3.2 Erasure Unit Control................................................................ MD-14
1.4.1 Unit Locations................................................................................... MD-4 3.3 Mounting Position of the Erasure Lamp................................... MD-16
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths.......................................... MD-4 3.4 LEDs on the SND37A Board and the CPU37A Board.............. MD-17
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions................................. MD-5 3.4.1 LEDs on the SND37A Board........................................................... MD-17
1.6 Board Locations........................................................................ MD-7 3.4.2 LEDs on the CPU37A Board........................................................... MD-18
1.6.1 Housing............................................................................................. MD-7 3.5 Checking the Voltage............................................................... MD-19
1.6.2 Erasure Unit...................................................................................... MD-7 3.5.1 Checking the Voltage of
the PSU27B Board/PSU27A Board Power Source......................... MD-19
1.6.4 Scanning Optics Unit......................................................................... MD-8
1.6.5 Light-Collecting Unit.......................................................................... MD-8 4. Descriptions of
1.6.6 Subscanning Unit.............................................................................. MD-8
Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation...............MD-20
2. Descriptions of Software Control..........................MD-9 4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence........................... MD-20
2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console......................................... MD-9 4.2 Correction Data....................................................................... MD-21
2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing............................................... MD-9 4.3 Image Data Flow..................................................................... MD-22
2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data............................................................ MD-9 4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem.................................... MD-23
2.2 Error Handling......................................................................... MD-10
2.3 What Is Sleep Mode?.............................................................. MD-10
2.4 RU Bootup Processing.............................................................MD-11
2.5 RU Termination Processing.......................................................MD-11

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.5


Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.6

5. Descriptions of
Mechanical Components and Their Operations....MD-24
5.1 IP Conveyance Flow................................................................ MD-24
5.2 Conveyance Operation............................................................ MD-24
5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation.......................................................... MD-24
5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation.......................................................... MD-27
5.3 Erasure Unit............................................................................ MD-29
5.4 Subscanning Unit.................................................................... MD-29
5.4.1 IP Reading...................................................................................... MD-29
5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading.................................................. MD-29

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.6


Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7

Troubleshooting (MT)

1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1


1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting..............................................................MT-1
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log..................................................MT-2
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log......................................................................MT-2
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble...................MT-3
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table.......................................................MT-4
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch.........................................MT-6

2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7


3. Detail Code............................................................. MT-38
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code...............................................MT-38

4. Abnormal Images.................................................. MT-39


4.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images............................................MT-39

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.7


Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.8

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit.......MC-1 4.6 CPU Board.............................................................................. MC-16


1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment............... MC-1 4.6.1 Replacement Procedures................................................................ MC-16
1.2 Types of Screws........................................................................ MC-1 4.6.2 Machine Data Backup..................................................................... MC-16
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding............................................ MC-1 4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board............................................................... MC-18
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance...................... MC-1 4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console........................... MC-21
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image............................ MC-1 4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version................................................. MC-22
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data............................................................ MC-25
2. Table of Contents....................................................MC-2 4.6.7 Confirming the S Value................................................................... MC-26
3. Cover........................................................................MC-3 4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize.................................................... MC-26
3.1 Cover........................................................................................ MC-3 4.7 SND Board.............................................................................. MC-27
3.2 Board Box Cover....................................................................... MC-4 4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly.................................................. MC-29
3.3 Left-hand Side Plate.................................................................. MC-5 4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet....................... MC-30
3.4 Bottom Cover............................................................................ MC-6 4.10 Fan (FAN1).............................................................................. MC-31
3.5 Back-Top Plate.......................................................................... MC-7 5. Cassette Set Unit...................................................MC-32
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate..................................................................... MC-8 5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4).............................................. MC-32
3.7 Top Plate................................................................................... MC-9 5.2 Shutter.................................................................................... MC-33
3.8 PNL Board............................................................................... MC-10 5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket.......................................................... MC-34
4. Housing Unit..........................................................MC-11 5.4 Cable Junction Bracket............................................................ MC-35
4.1 Duct (Right)..............................................................................MC-11 5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly................................. MC-36
4.2 Duct (Left)................................................................................MC-11 5.6 Arm (White) (Reference Side).................................................. MC-38
4.3 Power Supply Assembly.......................................................... MC-12 5.7 Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)................................... MC-39
4.4 PSU27A Power Supply............................................................ MC-14 5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3)............................................. MC-40
4.5 PSU27B Board........................................................................ MC-15 5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1)......................................... MC-41
5.10 Guide (Large).......................................................................... MC-43
5.11 IP Suction Arm......................................................................... MC-44
5.12 Suction Cup ............................................................................ MC-46
020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.8
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.9

5.13 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)........................................................ MC-48 7. Conveyor Unit........................................................MC-71


5.14 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2).................................................... MC-49 7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side)....................... MC-71
5.15 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)..................................... MC-50 7.2 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1).............................. MC-72
5.16 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side).... MC-51 7.3 Rubber Rollers (A, B)............................................................... MC-73
5.17 IP Suction Pump (PA1)............................................................ MC-52 7.4 Rubber Roller (C, D)................................................................ MC-75
5.18 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1)............................................. MC-53 7.5 Rubber Roller (E)..................................................................... MC-77
5.19 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), 7.6 Conveyor Guide Assembly...................................................... MC-79
IP Sensor Retaining Bracket.................................................... MC-54 7.7 Rubber Roller (F)..................................................................... MC-80
5.20 Roller (Small) Assembly........................................................... MC-55 7.8 IP Sensor (SC3)...................................................................... MC-82
5.21 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side).................................... MC-56 7.9 Antistatic Member.................................................................... MC-83
5.22 Cassette Set Base Assemblies................................................ MC-57
5.23 Side-Positioning Motor (MA3).................................................. MC-59 8. Light-Collecting Unit.............................................MC-84
5.24 Solenoid (SOLA1).................................................................... MC-60 8.1 Light-Collecting Unit................................................................. MC-84
5.25 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8).......................................... MC-61 8.2 PMT Board.............................................................................. MC-87
5.26 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9)................................ MC-62 9. Scanning Optics Unit............................................MC-88
5.27 Guide Plates, Stopper (Inch/metric)......................................... MC-63 9.1 Scanning Optics Unit............................................................... MC-88
5.28 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly............................................. MC-64
10. Subscanning Unit..................................................MC-92
6. Erasure Unit...........................................................MC-66 10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly.................................. MC-92
6.1 Erasure Unit............................................................................ MC-66 10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)................................................ MC-94
6.2 Reflection Plate....................................................................... MC-67 10.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1)......................................................... MC-95
6.3 Filter........................................................................................ MC-68 10.4 Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly............................................ MC-96
6.4 INV Board............................................................................... MC-69 10.5 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and
6.5 Lamp Assembly....................................................................... MC-70 Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly.............................. MC-97
10.6 Subscanning Grip Assembly.................................................... MC-99
10.7 Center Roller......................................................................... MC-102

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.9


Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.10

10.8 Rubber Roller (G).................................................................. MC-104


10.9 Guide (A)............................................................................... MC-105
10.10 Rubber Roller (H).................................................................. MC-106
10.11 Rubber Roller (I).................................................................... MC-108
10.12 Guide (B)............................................................................... MC-109
10.13 Rubber Roller (J)....................................................................MC-110
10.14 Scanner Cleaning Brush.........................................................MC-112

11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations.........MC-114


11.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures..................MC-114
11.2 CPU Board Fuses..................................................................MC-115
11.3 SND Board Fuses..................................................................MC-115
11.4 PSU27B Board Fuses............................................................MC-116

12. List of Jigs and Tools..........................................MC-117


12.1 Jigs and Tools.........................................................................MC-117

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.10


Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.11

Maintenance Utility (MU)

1. RU PC-TOOL............................................................MU-1 2. Client PC................................................................MU-25


1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree....................................... MU-1 2.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC................................ MU-25
1.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window.............................................................. MU-1 2.1.1 Features of the Client PC................................................................ MU-25
1.1.2 Tree Diagram.................................................................................... MU-1 2.1.2 Operations of the Client PC............................................................ MU-26
1.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL............................................. MU-2 2.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC................................................ MU-27
1.3 Maintenance Mode.................................................................... MU-2 2.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive.... MU-27
1.4 LIST OF EXISTING RU............................................................. MU-3 2.1.5 Precautions in Setting the Console................................................. MU-27
1.5 NEW......................................................................................... MU-3 2.2 Setting Up the Client PC.......................................................... MU-28
1.6 DELETE.................................................................................... MU-4 2.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM............... MU-28
1.7 MUTL........................................................................................ MU-4 2.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive..... MU-28
1.8 PING......................................................................................... MU-5 2.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL...................................................... MU-29
1.9 MON......................................................................................... MU-6 2.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification.............. MU-30
1.10 FTP........................................................................................... MU-7 2.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List........................................... MU-31
1.11 INSTALL.................................................................................... MU-8 2.5.1 RU Registration............................................................................... MU-31
1.12 VERSION UP.......................................................................... MU-10 2.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE.......................................................... MU-32
1.13 EDIT HISTORY....................................................................... MU-12 2.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations............... MU-32
1.14 EDIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................... MU-13 2.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode........................................................... MU-33
1.15 EDIT CL NAME....................................................................... MU-15 2.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode......................................................... MU-34
1.16 BACKUP................................................................................. MU-16 2.7 Data Flow of Each Command.................................................. MU-35
1.17 RESTORE............................................................................... MU-17 2.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD............................................................ MU-35
1.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT............................................................... MU-18 2.7.2 READ and WRITE........................................................................... MU-35
1.19 ERROR DB............................................................................. MU-19 2.7.3 Import and Export............................................................................ MU-35

1.20 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs............................................................. MU-20 2.8 Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after Improper
1.21 VERSION UP: ALL RUs........................................................... MU-21 CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation.................................................. MU-36
2.8.1 Solution-1........................................................................................ MU-37
1.22 CDPath................................................................................... MU-22
2.8.2 Solution-2........................................................................................ MU-37
1.23 Initialize APL............................................................................ MU-24
020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.11
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.12

2.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL.................................................... MU-38 3.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT............................................................... MU-53
2.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM............... MU-39 3.19 ERROR DB............................................................................. MU-53
2.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive.... MU-39 3.20 READ...................................................................................... MU-54
2.10 Checking the Console Setup when Using the Client PC........... MU-40 3.21 WRITE.................................................................................... MU-55
2.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC.......... MU-41 3.22 UPLOAD................................................................................. MU-56
3.23 DOWNLOAD........................................................................... MU-57
3. CLIENT PC-TOOL..................................................MU-42
3.24 CDPath................................................................................... MU-58
3.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree.............................. MU-42
3.25 Export..................................................................................... MU-58
3.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window.................................................... MU-42
3.26 Import...................................................................................... MU-59
3.1.2 Tree Diagram.................................................................................. MU-42
3.27 OnLine.................................................................................... MU-59
3.2 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL.................................... MU-43
3.28 Network................................................................................... MU-60
3.3 Maintenance Mode.................................................................. MU-43
3.4 Hospital List............................................................................. MU-44 4. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions................MU-61
3.5 NEW RU................................................................................. MU-44 4.1 Tree of MUTL.......................................................................... MU-61
3.6 DELETE.................................................................................. MU-45 4.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL................................................. MU-63
3.7 COPY...................................................................................... MU-45 4.3 Details of MUTL....................................................................... MU-65
3.8 RENAME................................................................................. MU-46 [1] Network Address............................................................................. MU-65
3.9 GET VERSION........................................................................ MU-46 [2] Conveyance Check......................................................................... MU-66
3.10 MUTL...................................................................................... MU-47 [3] Board Check................................................................................... MU-67
3.11 PING....................................................................................... MU-47 [3-1] CPU Board Setting Display............................................................. MU-67
3.12 MON....................................................................................... MU-48 [3-2] Panel Check.................................................................................... MU-68
3.13 FTP......................................................................................... MU-49 [3-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off......................................................................... MU-68
3.14 VERSION UP.......................................................................... MU-50 [3-2-2] BUZZER On/Off.............................................................................. MU-68
3.15 EDIT HISTORY....................................................................... MU-51 [4] Software Check............................................................................... MU-69
3.16 EDIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................... MU-51 [4-1] Ver. Display..................................................................................... MU-69
3.17 EDIT CL NAME....................................................................... MU-52 [4-2] MAC Address Display..................................................................... MU-69

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.12


Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.13

[5] Virtual Image Check........................................................................ MU-70 [6-6] Trouble Shooting............................................................................. MU-86


[5-1] LED Virtual Read............................................................................ MU-70 [6-6-1] Shading Correction ON/OFF........................................................... MU-86
[5-2] PMT Virtual Read............................................................................ MU-71 [6-7] HV ON/OFF..................................................................................... MU-87
[6] Scanner Check................................................................................ MU-72 [6-8] S Value............................................................................................ MU-87
[6-1] Polygon Motor................................................................................. MU-72 [6-8-1] S Value Now.................................................................................... MU-87
[6-2] Laser............................................................................................... MU-73 [6-8-2] S Value Calculate............................................................................ MU-88
[6-3] HV Diagnostic................................................................................. MU-74 [6-8-3] PMT/Light Guide Change................................................................ MU-88
[6-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic..................................................................... MU-74 [6-8-3-1] LED Initialize................................................................................ MU-88
[6-4] Format Adjustment.......................................................................... MU-75 [7] For Design....................................................................................... MU-89
[6-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)............................................................ MU-76
Appendix.1 Procedures for
[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel).............................................................. MU-78
[6-4-3] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel).......................................................... MU-80 Changing the RU IP Address........Appx MU-1
[6-4-4] Default Setting (FREQ)................................................................... MU-82 Appendix.2 Procedures for Changing
[6-4-5] Default Setting (Pixel)..................................................................... MU-82
the IP Address of the FTP Server....Appx MU-2
[6-4-6] Optic Setting (FREQ)...................................................................... MU-82
[6-4-7] Optic Setting (Pixel)........................................................................ MU-82 Appendix.3 Procedures for Returning the IP Address
[6-5] Correction........................................................................................ MU-83
and FTP Server Address Specified in
[6-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction........................................................ MU-83
[6-5-1-1] ST (GR)........................................................................................ MU-83
the RU to the Default Values.........Appx MU-3
[6-5-2] Shading Speed Correction.............................................................. MU-84
[6-5-2-1] ST (GR)........................................................................................ MU-84
[6-5-3] Sensitivity Correction...................................................................... MU-85
[6-5-3-1] ST (GR)........................................................................................ MU-85
[6-5-4] Sensitivity S-Value Correction......................................................... MU-86
[6-5-4-1] Existing S-Value........................................................................... MU-86
[6-5-4-2] Expected S-Value......................................................................... MU-86

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.13


Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.14

Service Parts List (SP)


How to Use Service Parts List............................................................SP-1 08 CONTROLLER........................................................................SP-25
INDEX.................................................................................................SP-2 09 OPTION...................................................................................SP-26
01A COVER 1 (#10001 to #59999)..................................................SP-3 10 CABLE.....................................................................................SP-27
01B COVER 2 (#60001 or Later)......................................................SP-4 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM................................................................SP-28
01C COVER 3...................................................................................SP-5 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE...............................................SP-31
02A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1...........................................................SP-6 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring..........................SP-32
02B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2...........................................................SP-7
02C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3
SUPPORTING CASSETE 15 x 30............................................SP-8
02D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4
NOT SUPPORTING CASSETE 15 x 30....................................SP-9
02E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5.........................................................SP-10
02F CASSETTE SET UNIT 6......................................................... SP-11
02G CASSETTE SET UNIT 7.........................................................SP-12
03A ERASURE UNIT 1 STANDARD TYPE (OUTSIDE JAPAN)....SP-13
03B ERASURE UNIT 2 HIGH CAPACITY TYPE..........................SP-14
04A CONVEYOR UNIT 1................................................................SP-15
04B CONVEYOR UNIT 2................................................................SP-16
05 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT......................................................SP-17
06 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT.....................................................SP-18
07A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1.........................................................SP-19
07B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2.........................................................SP-20
07C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3.........................................................SP-21
07D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4.........................................................SP-22
07E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5.........................................................SP-23
07F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6.........................................................SP-24

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.14


Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.15

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. How to Use 8. Cassette Set Unit...................................................PM-14


the Preventive Maintenance Section.....................PM-1 8.1 Cleaning the Roller (Small).......................................................PM-14
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List....................................... PM-2 8.2 Cleaning the Suction Cups.......................................................PM-14
1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when 8.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.....................................................PM-15
the Machine Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or 8.4 Cleaning the Shutter.................................................................PM-16
when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached... PM-4 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit.....................................................PM-16
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when
9. Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-17
the Machine Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or
when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached........... PM-5 9.1 Removing the Bottom Cover.....................................................PM-17
9.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly...........PM-17
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures.......................PM-6 9.3 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit...........................................PM-17
2.1 Backing Up the Log................................................................... PM-6 9.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-17
2.2 Checking the Error Log.............................................................. PM-7 9.5 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit...........................................PM-18
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................................. PM-8 9.6 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly....PM-18
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance..........................PM-9 9.7 Reinstalling the Bottom Cover...................................................PM-18

4. Pulling Out the Machine.......................................PM-10 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-19

5. Removing the Covers........................................... PM-11 11. Reinstalling the Covers and


5.1 Removing the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)................................. PM-11 Cleaning the Covers..............................................PM-19
5.2 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Years)...................................... PM-11 11.1 Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)...............................PM-19
11.2 Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)....................................PM-19
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch................... PM-11 11.3 Cleaning the Covers.................................................................PM-19
7. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-12 12. Securing the Machine...........................................PM-20
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit.......................................................PM-12
7.2 Cleaning the Filter.....................................................................PM-12 13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding....PM-20
7.3 Cleaning the Reflection Plate....................................................PM-13
020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.15
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.16

14. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-20


15. Confirming the S Value.........................................PM-21
16. Checking the Error Log........................................PM-21

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.16


Contents Installation (IN) 0.17

Installation (IN)

1. Specifications of the Machine..................................IN-1 7. Installing the Console.............................................IN-16


2. Installation Work Flowchart.....................................IN-2 8. Installing the RU PC-TOOL.....................................IN-17
8.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL........................................................ IN-20
3. Preparation for Installation.......................................IN-3
8.2 Uninstalling the RU PC-TOOL.................................................... IN-22
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation............................................... IN-3
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements............................................................ IN-3 9. Installing the RU Software......................................IN-24
3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................... IN-3
10. Starting Up the RU..................................................IN-25
3.1.3 Precautions for System Connection (Outside Japan)......................... IN-3
3.2 Unloading.................................................................................... IN-4 11. Changing the RU and FTP Server Settings...........IN-25
3.2.1 Unloading (Only in USA)..................................................................... IN-5
3.2.2 Unloading (Outside Japan and USA).................................................. IN-7
12. Image/Conveyance Checks....................................IN-26
3.3 Transfer....................................................................................... IN-9 12.1 Preparations.............................................................................. IN-26
3.4 Temporary Placement.................................................................. IN-9 12.2 Image/Conveyance Checks....................................................... IN-26
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied..................................................... IN-10 13. Confirming the S Value...........................................IN-28
4. Installation Procedures...........................................IN-12 14. Powering OFF the Console/RU..............................IN-30
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member...................... IN-12
15. Cleaning the Console/RU.......................................IN-30
5. Connecting the Cables...........................................IN-13
5.1 Checking the Power Cable........................................................ IN-13
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable.................................................. IN-14

6. Final Placement.......................................................IN-15
6.1 Securing the Machine................................................................ IN-15
6.2 Connecting and Retaining the Power Cable............................... IN-15

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.17


Contents Installation (IN) 0.18

Appendix 1. Installing in the Patient Environment....... Appx IN-1 8. Securing the Stand Wagon............................................... Appx IN-19
1. Installing in the Patient Environment................................... Appx IN-1 8.1 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Floor........................................ Appx IN-19
8.2 Fixing the Stand Wagon on the Wall........................................ Appx IN-20
Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with 8.3 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Additional Stand for LCD........ Appx IN-22
the Anti-Drop Retainer............................... Appx IN-2
Appendix 4. Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in
1. Components....................................................................... Appx IN-2
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Drop Retainer.............. Appx IN-2
Respective Fixing Modes........................ Appx IN-23

Appendix 3. Assembling and Securing the Stand Wagon and Appendix 5. Embedding the Anchor Nut.................... Appx IN-24
Additional Stand for LCD.......................... Appx IN-4 Appendix 6. Inch/Metric Switching Procedure........... Appx IN-25
1. Components....................................................................... Appx IN-5 1. Removing the Cover......................................................... Appx IN-25
2. Assembling the Additional Stand for LCD............................ Appx IN-9 2. Switching the Guide Plate and Stopper (inch/metric)......... Appx IN-25
3. Installing the Optional Items for the Stand Wagon............. Appx IN-10 3. Switching the Cassette Close Lid Roller............................ Appx IN-26
3.1 Installing the Guide Bracket for Long Cassette........................ Appx IN-10 4. Switching the IP Retaining Guide...................................... Appx IN-27
4. Installing the Optional Items for 5. Switching the Side-Positioning Guide,
the Additional Stand for LCD..............................................Appx IN-11 Bracket, and Stopper........................................................ Appx IN-28
4.1 Mounting the Arm..................................................................... Appx IN-11 6. Reinstall the Caver........................................................... Appx IN-32
4.2 Installing the Base.................................................................... Appx IN-11
Appendix 7. High Capacity Type
4.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack and the Rack for Long Cassette.... Appx IN-12
5. Applying the Seal............................................................. Appx IN-13 Installation Procedure............................. Appx IN-33
6. Fixing the Machine........................................................... Appx IN-14 1. Replace the Eraser Unit and Make DipSW Settings.......... Appx IN-33
7. Securing the Additional Stand for LCD.............................. Appx IN-15 2. Setting Up EDIT CONFIGURATION.................................. Appx IN-33
7.1 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD to the Floor (Anchor Nut).... Appx IN-15
7.2 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Screw)......... Appx IN-16
7.3 Fixing the Additional stand for LCD on the Wall
(Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type))......................................... Appx IN-17

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.18


Contents Installation (IN) 0.19

Appendix 8. Nothing..................................................... Appx IN-34


Appendix 9. Vehicle Mounting Procedures................. Appx IN-35
1. Installing the Equipment.................................................... Appx IN-35
2. When Moving the Vehicle................................................. Appx IN-35
3. When Using the Equipment.............................................. Appx IN-35

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.19


Contents Performance Check (PC) 0.20

Performance Check (PC)

CR-IR 392 Performance Check List............................. PC-1


Installation Information.........................................................................PC-1
Checklist..............................................................................................PC-1

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.20


0.21
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.21


0.22
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.22


Control Sheet
Revision
Issue date Reason Pages affected
number
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5870) All pages
09.23.2011 02 Revision (FM5937) 3-5, 8
03.15.2012 03 Revision (FM6003) 1, 3, 6, 8-10, 12, 13, 16, 17

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Safety Precaution

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


Safety-1

1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts


l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch.
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible
l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
1.1 General Precautions carelessly).
l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
WARNING switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
No modification of this equipment is allowed. n Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the
erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the
n Electrical System Components/Parts inside of a broken part.
- Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the
n Other Working Precautions
machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged, you
may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even when l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing procedures, Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, protective housings back exactly where they were.
as instructed in this manual. l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your body. If because of possible electric shock hazards.
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic components l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise
due care against electric shock or other hazards.
on the board. l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
- Do not connect any unspecified device. because you may suffer burns.
- Ensure sufficient space around the power plug or the inlet. l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to
wear an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body.
n Drive System Components/Parts Static electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, and other drive mechanism l Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or
retainers.
parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and another label over them.
clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
n Heavy Objects have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and n Grounding
installation of heavy objects. Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
n Safety Devices
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, panels, and covers) should always be restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may impair their safety to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
features. that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-1


Safety-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment
Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the hospital’s
l For CR-IR 392
director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient environment or
As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the right-hand side cover not.
of the machine, this is the machine of Class 1, which complies with “ Laser Products -
Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff
1.3.1 Additional Protective Grounding
(Laser Notice No. 50).” The image reader incorporates a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor
laser wavelength of 659 nm, red visible light) with a maximum output of 68.2 mW (maximum If the machine is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the
output of 130 mW under fault conditions), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
perform tasks as instructed in the service manual. Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used room"
are given below.
n Precautions Against Laser Exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. l Patient environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in in height from the area of the patient’s body.
this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the removed It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a
laser beam out of the machine. l Medically-used room
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts. terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used
l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room. Generally, a portion of the
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs medically-used room is the patient environment.
described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified.
l Non-medically used room
l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you may
be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-2


Safety-3
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine 1.5 Notes on Additional Stand for LCD Use
The installation space and the method of retaining the machine are limited in a site where a
long cassette is used. 1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where
the Additional Stand for LCD Is Used
WARNING
Exercise care in the following when working in a user’s site where the additional stand for
l Be sure to follow the precautions below in a site where a long cassette is used.
LCD (Available Item) is used.
- Use a table which can retain the machine and support the long cassette's weight.
Placing extraordinary pressure on the long cassette inserted into the machine CAUTION
may cause injury or damage the machine.
- Install the machine at a place where the space in front of the machine is 1000mm When pushing the machine into the additional stand for LCD or pulling the machine
or more. out of the additional stand for LCD, exercise care so that your fingers are not caught
between the additional stand for LCD and machine.

1.5.2 Cautions in Using the Additional Stand for LCD


It is important to note the followings when using the additional stand for LCD (Available Item).

CAUTION
Since the optional additional stand for LCD or the cassette rack is for exclusive use of
the machine, do not use for other purposes. Do not use the additional stand for LCD in
manners other than mentioned in the Operation Manual, such as used as a stool or a
chair, or putting on an object other than specified.

u INSTRUCTION u
Do not impact the additional stand for LCD while reading the image. Otherwise, image
abnormality might result.

l When using this equipment on a vehicle, secure a rack for fall-prevention, and
secure the equipment and the rack with the anti-drop retainer (option). 1.5.3 Precautions in
Preventing the Additional Stand for LCD from Toppling
Refer to the following for retaining the additional stand for LCD to prevent the supporter from
toppling.
{IN:Appendix 3-7._Securing the Additional Stand for LCD}

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-3


Safety-4

2. Labels
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels

2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations


Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution
labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-
22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff (Laser Notice No. 50).” issued by the FDA of the U.S.

a: IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label


b: HHS Certification and Identification Label

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-4


Safety-5
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels n IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label

n HHS Certification and Identification Label

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-5


Safety-6
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels n Ratings Indication Labels

l For use in Japan (including the EMC conformation mark)


n Attachment Position

l For use outside Japan

l For use outside Japan (Ed3)

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-6


Safety-7
2.3 Chinese Label n Chinese Label

n Attachment Position

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-7


Safety-8
2.4 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations 2.4.2 Covers

u NOTE u
2.4.1 Scanning Optics Unit Always use a cable conforming to the specifications at a position with a caution label applied.
Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the scanning optics unit.

IEC60601-1 9.4.2.3
compliance Label

Cassette right
adjust label

Caution label
PRT030003001.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-8


Safety-9
REFERENCES 2.4.3 Power Cable Caution Label (USA Only)
The mercury regulation application mark for Vermont or other states is applied only to inch
machines for use outside Japan. Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for U.S.A.)

DETAIL A

A
Additional protective
ground mark

Mercury regulation application


Caution Label mark for Vermont or other states 2.4.4 Dummy Cassette (For Mobile)
PRT030003002.ai

PRT03Sa02001.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-9


Safety-10
2.5 Safety and Symbols
The safety symbols used in CR-IR 392 are as follows.
Symbol Remarks

Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS

High temperature

OFF (Power)

ON (Power)

Protective ground mark

AC

Recycle the waste from electrical and electronic equipment separately

Year of Manufacture

Chinese Environmental Regulations


(Expiration date before when the chemical substance included in this product
does not affect the environment)

Stand-by switch

No sitting

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-10


Safety-11

3. Protective Housings against


Laser Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, a laser beam will never leak
out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical
path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other
people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the
protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
n Protective Housing of the Machine
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The four covers
marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure.
Left-hand
side cover

Board box cover Left-hand side


light protect plate

Bottom cover

Rear light Rear cover


protect plate
Right-hand
side cover

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-11


Safety-12

4. CLASSIFICATION
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT

2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock


NO APPLIED PART

3. Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter


IP00

4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a


flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide.

5. According to the mode of operation


CONTINUOUS OPERATION

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-12


Safety-13

5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2/EN60601-1-2


- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be
installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as follows.
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices - The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
to the IEC60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 and the EN60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006 required in the exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement parts
MDD93/42/EEC. for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a machine.
typical medical installation.
PART NO. General Specification
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other 136N0427 (USA)
devices in the vicinity. Power Cable 136N0450 (UK)
136N0377 (Europe)
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be determined Cat5E or more.
I/F Cable -
by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference Straight cable of UTP type.
by one or more of the following measures; - The machine should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the machine should be observed to verify normal
- Increase the separation between the equipment. operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other
device(s) are connected. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The machine uses RF energy only for
its internal function. Therefore, its RF
RF emissions
Group 1 emissions are very low and are not likely to
CISPR 11
cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
The machine is suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and
Class A (*1)
IEC 61000-3-2 those directly connected to the public low-
voltage power supply network that supplies
Voltage fluctuations/flicker buildings used for domestic purposes.
emissions Complies (*1)
IEC 61000-3-3
*1: The applicable ranges for the harmonic emissions IEC61000-3-2 and voltage fluctuations/flicker
emissions IEC61000-3-3 cover those machines with power supply voltage of 220 V or higher, and
they are not applicable to machines with the power supply voltage less than 220 V. Therefore,
they are considered to be “not applicable” to the machines with the power supply voltage less
than 220 V, with which most of the machines for use in Japan are concerned.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-13


Safety-14
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic IEC 60601 test Compliance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment - Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level level
guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to
(ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - 80MHz any part of the machine, including cables,
±8kV air ±6kV contact ceramic tile. If floors than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 are covered with calculated from the equation applicable to
±2kV air synthetic material, the frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air the relative humidity
±8kV air should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%.
Electrical fast transient/ ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 P
burst lines lines should be that of a
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - d = 1.2 P 80 MHz - 800 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines or hospital 2.5GHz
environment. d = 2.3 P 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
Surge ±1kV Line to Line ±1kV Line to Line Mains power quality
should be that of a where P is the maximum output power rating
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV Line to Ground ±2kV Line to Ground typical commercial of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
or hospital the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
environment. recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial as determined by an electromagnetic site
power supply input or hospital survey,a should be less than the compliance
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT environment. If level in each frequency range.b
(60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) the user of the
IEC 61000-4-11 machine requires Interference may occur in the vicinity of
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation equipment marked with the following symbol:
during power mains
70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the machine be
powered from an
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT uninterruptible power NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery. NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
for 5 s for 5 s
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
field should be at levels environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
characteristic of a considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the machine is used
IEC 61000-4-8 typical location in a exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the machine should be observed to verify normal
typical commercial operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
or hospital such as reorienting or relocating the machine.
environment.
b
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-14


Safety-15
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the machine
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated
RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the machine can help
prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the machine as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.

Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter


output power of m
transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation
is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-15


Safety-16

6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing equipment
and IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply with
the system standard IEC 60601-1-1:2000 and IEC 60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part
configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the
requirements of IEC 60601-1-1:2000 and IEC 60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local representative.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-16


Safety-17

7. Cautions on Network
- Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other
systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network
separation.
- After modifying the network, confirm that the system is not affected. If it is affected, take
appropriate countermeasures including:
- Replacing connected device
- Connecting additional devices
- Removing devices
- Updating devices
- Upgrading devices

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-17


Safety-18
BLANK PAGE

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-18


Safety-19
BLANK PAGE

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-19


Control Sheet
Revision
Issue date Reason Pages affected
number
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5870) All pages
09.23.2011 02 Revision (FM5937) 1, 4, 8
03.15.2012 03 Revision (FM6003) 2
12.01.2012 04 Revision (FM6113) 1

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Product Specifications

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


Spec-1

1. Specifications of the Machine 1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types

n Available IP Types
1.1 Product Code - ST-VI type

n Available IP Sizes
n Machine Main Body
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10, (15 x 30)
Abbreviated product name Destination Qty. Unit Pantomography - Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, (15 x 30)
CR IR 392 RU = : # Japan 1 Inch Not supported REFERENCES
CR IR 392 RU PNTM = : # Japan 1 Inch Supported - 15x30 cm (pantomography size) IP can be used only on the machine that supports
CR IR 392 RU PNTM = USA : E USA 1 Inch Supported pantomography.
- Note that both inch- and metric-sized IPs cannot be used concurrently.
Outside Japan, USA and
CR IR 392 RU = : E 1 Metric Not supported - Whether or not pantomography is to be supported cannot be changed in the market.
China
Outside Japan, USA and
CR IR 392 RU PNTM = : E 1 Metric Supported
China
1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes
CR IR 392 RU PNTM = CN : E China 1 Metric Supported
CR IR 392 RU2 PNTM = : # Japan 1 Inch Supported
CR IR 392 RU2 PNTM = USA : E USA 1 Inch Supported
n Cassette CC (ST Cassette)
Outside Japan, USA and
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10, (15 x 30)
CR IR 392 RU2 PNTM = : E 1 Metric Supported - Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, (15 x 30)
China
Outside Japan, USA and REFERENCE
CR IR 392 RU2 PNTM INC = : E 1 Inch Supported
China 15x30 cm (pantomography size) cassette can be used only on the machine that supports
CR IR 392 RU2 PNTM = CN : E China 1 Metric Supported pantomography.

n Cassette LC (Long Cassette)


REFERENCE
The machine can read a long cassette, but cannot combine images on the Console.

l Twin cassette
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17-twin, 10 x 12-twin
- Metric (cm): 24 x 30-twin

l Triple cassette
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17-triple, 14 x 14-triple, 10 x 12-triple

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-1


Spec-2
1.4 Optional Item/Available Item Components 1.5 Product Specifications

n Optional Items n Maximum Heat Generation


Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks Standby: 0.36 MJ/h or less
- 50 pieces/hour for Operating: 0.62 MJ/h or less
14” x 14” (35 x 35 cm) Hibernation: 0.07 MJ/h or less
IR 392 UPGRADE KIT = E High-speed reading kit 1
- Pixel density
5 pix/mm n Noise
Patient environment During idling: 50 dB or less
IR 355 AC CORD P 100-120V # 1 Only for Japan
installation kit When in use: 55 dB or less
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E Power cable 1 For use in Great Britain Single sound: 65 dB or less

For use in European n Warm-up Time


countries other than
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E Power cable 1 the Great Britain, and l In case only RU is started
for other overseas
30 seconds or less
countries
IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V UL E Power cable 1 For Europe l Recovery from the Sleep mode
Japanese reference 25 seconds or less
IR 392 REFERENCE GUIDE A # 1 Only for Japan
guide (binder type)
n I/F cable
For retaining the
IR 392 TABLE FIX KIT = #(E) Anti-Drop Retainer kit 1 UTP cable of straight type and category 5E or more
machine

■ Available Item
Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks
IR 392 ADD STAND FOR LCD = #(E) Additional Stand for LCD 1 *1
IR 392 STAND WAGON = #(E) Stand Wagon 1
IR 391 CASSETTE RACK = #(E) Cassette rack 1 *1
IR 355 CASSETE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1 *1
IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm 1 *1
Wall-retaining fitting
IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) 1 *1
(long type)
IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 *1
For Europe
IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1
*1
IR 392 SUPPORT BAR FOR LC = #(E) Support Bar for LC 1
Dummy cassette for Enclosed to
IR DUMMY CASSETTE FOR MBL #(E) 1
mobile the Operation Manual
*1 Additional Stand for LCD and its options are not UL certified.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-2


Spec-3
1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity 1.7 Moving Means for the Machine
Move the machine by raising it up.
n Dimensions
u INSTRUCTION u
W560×D540×H392 (mm) (except protrusions)
Always work in pairs.

n Weight
Approx 39 kg (86.0 lb).

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-3


Spec-4
1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine u INSTRUCTION u
When you stand the machine on the anti-drop retainer, be sure to pull out the machine to the
To retain the machine, use the anti-drop retainer. position indicated in the following figure before standing the machine. When the machine
is stood at a position other than the one indicated in the following figure, the cover of the
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine by Use of the Anti-Drop Retainer machine might get damaged by the anti-drop retainer.

Under the following circumstance, use the anti-drop retainer (optional) to retain the machine.
- When requested by the institute

REFERENCE
Out of eight screw holes on the base plate, four outer holes are spare ones.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-4


Spec-5
1.9 Environmental Conditions 1.10 Electrical Specifications

n Climate Conditions n Frequency


Single-phase, 50-60 Hz, ±3%
l Operating
Temperature: 15°C to 30°C n Input Voltage
Relative humidity: 15% to 80% (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa l For Japan
[%] 80 Single-phase, 100 V~ ±10%
70
Relative humidity

60 l For other than Japan


50 Single-phase, 100-240 V~ ±10%
40
30 n Rated Amperage
20
15
10 l For Japan
Single-phase, 100 V~, 50-60 Hz : 1.9 A
5 10 15 20 25 30 [°C]
Temperature FRRB0505.ai
l For other than Japan
Single-phase, 100-240 V~, 50-60 Hz : 1.9-0.8A
l Non-operating
Temperature: 0 to 45°C (should not freeze) n Power Consumption
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa l CR-IR 392 (Standard Type)
Operating: 170 VA or less
l Transit/storage
Standby: 100 VA or less
Temperature: -10 to 50°C (should not freeze)
Remote standby: 60 VA or less
Relative humidity: 10% RH (-10°C) to 90% RH (50°C) (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
l CR-IR 392 (High Capacity Type)
n Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration Operating: 190 VA or less
Standby: 100 VA or less
10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.015 mm or less in amplitude
Remote standby: 60 VA or less
n Floor Levelness
n Grounding
10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left
Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less)
n Floor Flatness
10 mm/m or less n Overload Protection
10 A

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-5


Spec-6
1.11 Servicing Space
When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-6


Spec-7
1.12 Installation Space l Side

1.12.1 Installting the Machine on the Table

l Upper

* This space is for viewing the LED of operation panel. You can set up the space longer than
500mm if without any trouble viewing the LED.
* This space is for operating the scanner cleaning handle. The space can be 100 mm (4.0 in.) or
less if there is no interference with the operation of scanner cleaning handle.
* This space is for operating the main power switch or for connecting the power cable. If there is
no interference with the operation of main power switch or power cable connection, the space
can be 100 mm (4.0 in.) or less.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-7


Spec-8
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Drop Retainer 1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used
When using the long cassette, use a table which can retain the machine and support the
l Installation space when retained by anti-drop retainer long cassette's weight.Placing extraordinary pressure on the long cassette inserted into the
machine may cause injury or damage the machine.

l Installation space when using the Long Cassette


For the machine uses long cassette, the space in front of the machine other the the usual
installation space is required.

* This space is for operating the scanner cleaning handle. The space can be 100 mm (4.0 in.) or
less if there is no interference with the operation of scanner cleaning handle.
* This space is for operating the main power switch or for connecting the power cable. If there is
no interference with the operation of main power switch or power cable connection, the space
can be 100 mm (4.0 in.) or less.

l Location of holes for the anti-drop retainer

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-8


Spec-9
1.12.4 Using the Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon l Installation space required when
the mount is attached to the additional stand for LCD
l Installation space required for the additional stand for LCD only The mount mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.

l Installation space required when l Installation space required for the stand wagon only
the cassette rack is attached to the additional stand for LCD
The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-9


Spec-10
1.13 Disposal

1.13.1 Disposal of IP
Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in each
country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-10


Spec-11
BLANK PAGE

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-11


Control Sheet
Isuue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5870) All pages
09.23.2011 02 Revision (FM5937) 5, 8, 24-31

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Machine Description (MD)

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


MD-1

1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration


The network supporting IEEE802.3 and FRUP data communication protocol are used in this
machine.
1.1 Features
u NOTE u
If the network has been cut off due to malfunction in networking device or any other causes,
n Features of the Machine image data cannot be transferred from this machine.
l Target
This machine is intended for small hospital, where a daily process count of IP is between 1 to n System Configuration 1
20. The machine is connected to the Console via a network.
l Improved dust resistance Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
Dust resistance is improved as there is no opening on the machine.
RU HUB Console
l Power supply
FRRB101001.ai
A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to the machine.

l Removal of IP static electricity n System Configuration 2


IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing attached Connect the machine, Console, and printer via network.
to each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush attached to the IP conveyance Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
path.
Printer
l Table top
The table is supposed to be 700mm height.

RU HUB Console

FRRB101002.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-1


MD-2
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions

Name Function
1.3.1 External View of Machine Operation panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
Eraser button <Function 1>
The button changes over the RU from the reading mode to the erasure
mode. When an IP is to be erased, press the button and change over
from the reading mode to the erasure mode.

<Function 2> *
The button can stop the buzzer sounding while the buzzer sounds with
an error or a high dose detected. The cassette can be removed at this
time.
Power/erasing mode
indicator lamp Lights up in green when the main power switch is ON. Lights up in
orange when the RU is changed over to the erasure mode.

* Only when "RELEASE ERROR (Mode Button)" in the CONFIGURATION is set to ON.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-2


MD-3
Name Function Name Function

Status display LED Indicates status of the RU. Over x-ray display lamp When a dose larger than 400 mR is detected, the buzzer sounds, this
lamp and the cassette removal lamp alternately flash, and the cassette
is ejected. The ejected cassette is incompletely erased.
: During startup
The incompletely erased cassette might cause image problems if used
as it is. Leave the incompletely erased cassette for 16 hours, and
erase it before using.
: End processing
Cassette removal lamp <When flashing alone (in blue)>
The lamp flashes (in blue) when the processed cassette can be
removed. The lamp goes out when the cassette is removed.
: IP processing
<When lights up alternately with the over X-ray display lamp>
The IP is ejected as incompletely erased.

: With the Console connected (online) <When lights up alternately with the cassette ready lamp>
The cassette is ejected as unprocessed.
Cassette ready lamp Lights up (in green) when the patient information is registered in
: Without Console connected (offline) the Console, and the cassette can be read. The cassette cannot
be inserted while this lamp is unlit. When this lamp lights up
alternately with the cassette removal lamp, the cassette is ejected as
: Error/warning indication unprocessed.
A number appears on the LED and flashes.
Stand-by switch <Function 1>
The button turns ON/OFF the power of the machine. Used to start up
If the erasure button or the stand-by switch
the machine alone. Keep pressing the button for approx. 4 seconds to
is pressed while the error/warning indication
turn OFF only the RU power.
Blinking number appears, the error/warning indication can be
canceled. If a plurality of errors occur, every time
<Function 2>
an indication is canceled, another error code
The button can stop the buzzer sounding while the buzzer sounds with
appears.
an error or a high dose detected. The cassette can be removed at this
Only lower three digits of the five-digit error code
time.
appear on the LED.
Inlet Connects the power cable.
: Maintenance indication
The “PC” indication flashes on the LED when a External device connector Used for network-connecting the external device.
RU PC-TOOL command is carried out. (I/F cable) Do not connect telephone lines.
Pressing the erasure button while pressing the
stand-by switch, the maintenance indication can Main power switch ON ( I ) : Main power ON
be canceled. OFF ( 0 ) : Main power OFF
Scanner cleaning handle Used for cleaning of the scanner by turning the scanner cleaning
handle in a counterclockwise direction.
Used when white streaks appear on the image.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-3


MD-4
1.4 Machine Components 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths

1.4.1 Unit Locations

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-4


MD-5
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions Symbol Name Type Function

SA1 Cassette IN sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is loaded, and is
in CLOSE state when the cassette is loaded.
SA2 Cassette hold sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is held, and is in
OPEN state when the cassette is held.
SA3 Suction arm HP sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the suction arm is at the
home position, and is in CLOSE state when the arm
is at the home position.
SA4 Cassette ejection PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is ejected, is in
sensor CLOSE state when the cassette is inserted, and in
OPEN state when the cassette is ejected.
SA5 IP length measurement Separate Measures the IP length according to the time interval
(SA5-1, sensor transmitting from the CLOSE state and OPEN state of the sensor.
SA5-2) type sensor SA5-1: Light emitting side
SA5-2: Light receiving side
SA6 IP protrusion PI (5 mm) Detects the position of the IP protrusion prevention
prevention sensor pin.
The IP protrusion prevention pin is protruded when
the sensore is in CLOSE state.
SA7 Side-positioning PI (5 mm) Detects the operation position of the side-positioning
detection sensor block.
The side-positioning block depended on the cassette
size in accordance with OPEN/CLOSE state of the
sensor works.
SA8 Small cassette size PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that a small-size cassette is
sensor loaded, and is in OPEN state when the small-size
cassette is loaded.
SA9 * "15x30 IP width" PI (5 mm) Identifies the 15x30cm IP width cassette.
identifying sensor The sensor is in OPEN state when the 15x30cm IP
width cassette is inserted, and in CLOSE state when
the cassette in other size is inserted.
SC3 IP sensor 1 PI (19 mm) Detects the IP. When the leading edge of IP reaches
this sensor, the signal is sent to the SND board.
Then, the IP conveyance speed changes from normal
conveyance speed to reading conveyance speed.
Sensor becomes CLOSE when IP is detected.
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light Detects the tip of the IP to be read.
(SED board) receiving
element
* Equipped only on the machine supporting pantomography.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-5


MD-6
Symbol Name Type Function

SZ2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5 mm) Detects that the grip mechanism is at its home position
(HP).
SOLA1 Cassette hold pin Power down Holds/releases the cassette hold pin. The sensor
solenoid solenoid is in OFF state when holding and in ON state when
releasing.
SVA1 IP air leak valve Solenoid Feeds the air to the suction cup to leak the IP from
valve the suction cup. It leaks the IP when turned ON.
PA1 IP suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP. It sucks the IP turned ON.
MA1 Suction arm driving Two-phase Drives the removal arm.
motor pulse motor
MA3 Side-positioning driving DC motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism.
motor
MC1 Side-positioning Two-phase Conveys the IP.
conveying motor pulse motor
MZ1 Subscanning motor Two-phase Conveys the IP.
pulse motor
MZ2 Soft-grip release motor Two-phase Drives the soft-grip mechanism.
pulse motor
FAN1 Power supply unit DC fan Cools the power supply unit.
cooling fan

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-6


MD-7
1.6 Board Locations 1.6.2 Erasure Unit

n Standard Type
1.6.1 Housing

n High Capacity Type

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-7


MD-8
1.6.4 Scanning Optics Unit 1.6.6 Subscanning Unit

1.6.5 Light-Collecting Unit

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-8


MD-9

2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data

u NOTE u l Settable items and default values


The settings are made from the RU PC-TOOL. The settable items and their default values
In this chapter, the "RU Application", "RU IP Address", and "RU Configuration" are referred to
are as follows.
shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
Setup items Setting means Default values
RU IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.10
2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console RU subnet mask RU PC-TOOL 255.255.0.0

The exchange of data between the RU and Console is described below. RU default gateway RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.0
FTP server IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.20
2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
RU secure IP address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
RU secure net address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
l Flow of image data
The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the CPU board, and transferred
l Flow of network setting data
to the Console via the network.
The network setting data is not written into the CPU board only by clicking [SET] button on
l Flow of log data the RU PC-TOOL window. You need click [UPDATE] button to write the network setting data
- The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon into the CPU board.
occurrence of a FATAL error. The contents set from the RU PC-TOOL are stored on the CPU board FLASH ROM.
- The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is reached, Console RU
and, once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis.

Console RU RU PC-TOOL CPU board


Image data
Network setting FLASH ROM
data
FTP server CPU board

COMMON FLASH ROM [SET]

Network setting
Memory (SDRAM) [UPDATE] data

Image data

Log data Log data


FRRB102001.ai

RU-specific data

FRRB102002.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-9


MD-10
2.2 Error Handling 2.3 What Is Sleep Mode?
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where it is The "Sleep mode" is such that, in order to save power, the conditions in the
inoperable. machine automatically change to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within
a specified period of time.
n Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP n Operation in the Sleep Mode
reading, the IP is returned to the cassette. Upon entering the Sleep mode, only the power of the CPU board is kept ON, while the power
of other components is left OFF.
n Cases where Retry Is Impossible (FATAL Error) Only the power/erasing mode indicator lamp on the operation panel lights up in green in the
(1) When the function of the CPU board stops. Sleep mode.
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops.
n Transition to the Sleep Mode

l Transition requirements
- If "Sleep mode ON" is set in the CONFIGURATION and the RU is not operated within the
preset "Sleep mode transition time" while the RU remains in READY state, the machine
transits to the Sleep mode.
- The stand-by switch is kept pressed for 4 seconds.
- When the Console is shut down.

l Setting the Sleep mode


You can specify whether the Sleep mode is to be used and the period of time in which the
machine transits to the Sleep mode in the CONFIGURATION.
- Whether the Sleep mode is to be used
Set by the “Sleep mode Change” command in the CONFIGURATION.
- Time to transit to the Sleep mode
Set by the “Sleep Mode Change Time ([min])” command in the CONFIGURATION.

n Recovery from Sleep Mode

l Recover requirements
Press the stand-by switch.

l Processing upon recovery


Upon recovery from the Sleep mode, the RU performs a home-positioning operation of the
suction arm.
In addition, the initial self-diagnosis of the mechanical components takes place, as well as
home-positioning of the RU suction arm, under one of the following conditions.
- The mechanical components are located at other than the home positions.
- One of sensors detects an IP.
- A cassette is set in the RU.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-10


MD-11
2.4 RU Bootup Processing 2.5 RU Termination Processing
The following self-diagnoses are carried out after the power is turned ON. Connection Termination processing of the mechanism and the log data storage take place.
verification between the RU and the Console is also carried out concurrently with the self-
u NOTE u
diagnoses.
If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be
n Initialization of the Mechanical Components saved.
The initialization of the mechanical components consists of the following five stages.

l Before IP search stage n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing


The suction arm is moved to the home position. (1) "Shutdown processing" command
Two instructions are available for a case where “system shutdown of the Console is
l IP search stage
carried out” and a case where “the stand-by switch of the RU is pressed”.
The motor is rotated by an appropriate amount to convey the IP to a position where it can
be confirmed by the sensor, on the assumption that the IP is located at a position where it (2) Execute "saving of log data", and turn OFF the power.
cannot be detected by the sensor within the machine. Saving of log data:
Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.
l After IP search stage
The suction arm is moved to the home position.

l Remaining IP ejection stage


When an IP is found within the machine during the IP search stage, its size is measured and
the IP is returned to the cassette. If a cassette is not set in the RU, the message prompting
to set an empty cassette appears.

l After remaining IP ejection


The cassette hold is released.

n Initialization of the Scanner Mechanism


The scanner mechanism is initialized.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-11


MD-12

3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Component to be protected
mounted part
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function
+5 V F7 PNL37A
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage +5 V F13 SYN27A, SED27A
output detection function, which offers the following features: CPU37A board
+5 V F19 PNL37A
- Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault.
+5 V F20 PNL37A
- The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors
the power supply voltage output. +24 V F8 IP suction pump: PA1
- The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection +24 V F9 Driver IC: U14 (without a motor connected)
circuits (points) in which an error has occurred.
- The DC motors are protected by a driver circuit (mounted on the board) which incorporates SND37A board +5 V F10 Sensor : SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4,
an overcurrent protection circuit. The driver circuit always detects a current and outputs a SA5 (SA5-1, SA5-2), SA6, SA7,
SA8, SA9, SC3, SZ1, SZ2
current of up to 2 A. If it detects the current larger than 2 A, it stops outputting the current
INV board: INV37A
by the protection circuit.
+12 VSB F1 CPU37A
3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection +5 V F2 CPU37A, SND37A, PNL37A
Circuit and the Components to Be Protected +15 V F3 CPU37A

Protection circuit PSU27B board -15 V F4 CPU37A


Power supply Component to be protected
mounted part
+24 V F6 INV37A
SND37A board +24 V DC motor: MA3
+24 V F7 CPU37A

REFERENCE +24 V F8 SND37A


The pulse motors (MA1, MC1, MZ1 and MZ2) are protected by the PSU27B board fuse (F8).

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-12


MD-13
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram

Power supply unit: PSU27B Sensor drive board: SND37A

F8 IP suction pump: PA1

F9 Driver IC: U14 (without a motor connected)


+5 V
+5V F2 F10 Sensors: SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4,
+24 V SA5 (SA5-1, SA5-2),
SA6, SA7, SA8, SA9,
SC3, SZ1, SZ2
+12V F1

DRV Pulse motor: MA1

DRV DC motor: MA3


+15V F3
DRV Pulse motor: MC1

DRV Pulse motor: MZ1


-15V F4
DRV Pulse motor: MZ3

INV board: INV37A


+5 V

+24 V
F6

+24V F7
CPU board: CPU37A
F8 IP leading-edge detection
board: SED27A
+5 V
F7 Start-point detection board
SYN27A
+12 V
F13
+24 V
F19 PNL board: PNL37A Fuse, and blown fuse detection circuit
F20
DRV Driver circuit incorporating an overcurrent
+15 V
protection circuit (upper limit of 2 A)
-15 V DRV Driver circuit without an overcurrent
protection circuit
PRIT103001.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-13


MD-14
3.2 Erasure Unit Control n Erasure Operation
Two kinds of operations are used, one for erasure after the IP reading (routine erasure) and
the other for erasure when the erasure button on the RU operation panel is pressed (primary
n Erasure Unit Control erasure).
The erasure lamp control circuit is located on the INV board. A control signal from the INV The difference between the two modes is whether or not an image is to be output.
board causes the relay circuit and the lamp inverter circuit to activate, for turning ON/OFF the
- Routine erasure
lamp and controlling detection of unlit lamps.
A dose exposed to the IP is measured, and the erasing method is changed depending
n Temperature Control of the Erasure Unit on the detected dose. The dose is measured when the image is read by the scanner
unit (light-collecting unit).
Since the temperature can be controlled by heat generation and self-cooling of the erasure
- If the detected dose is lower than 400mR, erasure operation takes place for the time
unit, temperature control is not performed. Therefore, the erasure unit is not equipped with a corresponding to the detected dose.
thermo sensor. - If the detected dose is 400mR or higher, erasure operation takes place for the time
equivalent to the one for 400mR, and the message of high dose detection is issued.
n Control Regarding Service Life of the Lamp
- Primary erasure
The illumination time of the erasure lamp is counted, and a warning informing of the
A dose exposed to the IP is measured similarly to routine erasure, and erasure
replacement period is issued.
operation takes place as follows. However, no image is output.
You can set the timing for issuing the warning or whether or not the user is to be notified in
- If the detected dose is lower than 120mR, erasure operation takes place for the time
the CONFIGURATION. equivalent to the one for 120mR.
The warning includes the following three stages. - If the detected dose is 120mR or higher and lower than 200mR, erasure operation takes
place for the time equivalent to the one for 200mR.
l Announcement of erasure lamp service life
- If the detected dose is 200mR or higher and lower than 400mR, erasure operation takes
When the illumination time of the erasure lamp approaches the assumed machine working
place for the time equivalent to the one for 400mR.
hours (reaches 1272 hours), a warning that the replacement period is approaching is issued. - If the detected dose is lower than 400mR or higher, erasure operation takes place for the
l Erasure lamp service life 1 time equivalent to the one for 400mR, and the message of high dose detection is issued.
When the illumination time of the erasure lamp reaches the assumed machine working hours
(reaches 1300 hours), a warning for prompting to replace the erasure lamp is issued.

l Erasure lamp service life 2


When the illumination time of the erasure lamp exceeds the assumed machine working hours
(reaches 1314 hours), a warning that the erasure cannot be guaranteed is issued.
The machine transits to the erasure degeneration mode after the warning is issued.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-14


MD-15
l Control in case of error
When an error occurs due to a burnt-out lamp or a blown-out fuse, the machine transits to
the erasure time extension mode or the erasure degeneration mode after the detection of the
error.
The relation of the conditions of the erasure unit lamps, the mode to transit, and the RU
operation are as follows:

Erasure unit condition Mode to transit RU operation


- One lamp has burnt out.
(When high capacity type is Erasure operations take place twice by means
installed, “One or two lamps of the erasure table for a case where “the dose
have burnt out.”) Erasure time is 120 mR or higher and lower than 400 mR”.
- One fuse of the INV board extension mode Lack of light intensity can be coped with by
has blown out. repeating the erasure operation twice with the
- A warning of “erasure lamp erasure time fixed.
service life 1” is issued.
- Two lamps have burnt out. The operation is the same as that for the
(When high capacity type erasure time extension mode. Since, however,
Erasure
is installed, “Three lamps the erasure performance cannot be guaranteed,
degeneration
have burnt out.”) a message indicating that the erasure cannot be
mode
- A warning of “erasure lamp guaranteed is issued. The image can be read
service life 2” is issued. as usual in the erasure degeneration mode.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-15


MD-16
3.3 Mounting Position of the Erasure Lamp n CR-IR 392 (High Capacity Type)

Positional relation between the erasure lamp and the INV board is as shown below.
REFERENCE
The number of erasure lamps of the erasure unit is different depending on the machine type.
Type Number of Erasure Four erasure lamps
Lamps
CR-IR 392 (Standard Type) 2
CR-IR 392 (High Capacity Type) 4
4
3
2
1
n CR-IR 392 (Standard Type)

Two erasure lamps

3
1

INV37A board

PRIT103002.ai

INV37A board

PRIT103006.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-16


MD-17
3.4 LEDs on the SND37A Board and the CPU37A Board LED No.
(illumination Name Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
3.4.1 LEDs on the SND37A Board D6 (green) Cassette IN Lit when the cassette is loaded/
Unlit when the cassette is not loaded
SND37A board D9 (green) Cassette hold Lit when the cassette is held/Unlit otherwise
D18 (green) Suction arm HP Lit when the removal arm is at the home position/
Unlit when the removal arm is at another position

D7 D56
D21 (green) INV37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D30 (green) 15x30 cassette Lit when a cassette other than the 15x30 cassette is loaded/
identification Unlit the 15x30 cassette is loaded
D33 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D13 D16

D36 (green) INV37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D39 (green) Cassette ejection Lit when the cassette is loaded/
Unlit when the cassette is ejected
D47 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D10 D19 D61, D62 D54, D55

D49 (green) IP sensor 2 Lit when the IP being conveyed is present/


Unlit when no IP is present
D53 (green) Grip release HP sensor Lit when the grip mechanism is at the home position/
Unlit otherwise
D54 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D55 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D59 (green) DSP1 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
D60 (green) DSP1 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
D61 (green) DSP2 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
D62 (green) DSP2 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
D10 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D13 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D59, D60
D15, D18, D21
D6, D9, D12
D33, D36
D24, D27, D30

D39, D42
D45, D47

D52, D53
D49, D51

D16 (orange) IP leak Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped


D19 (orange) Suction switchover Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D56 (orange) IP suction pump Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped

PRIT103004.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-17


MD-18
3.4.2 LEDs on the CPU37A Board LED No.
(illumination Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
CPU37A board D7 (green) Lit when communicating with the PC/Unlit otherwise
D8 (green) Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
D10 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D11 (green) Always flashes 45 seconds after the machine power is turned ON
D7, D8 D12 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
CN10 D13 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D14 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D15 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D10∼D25
D16 (green) Polygon speed HR_MODE enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D17 (green) PMT artificial voltage ON enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D18 (green) PMT artificial light source forcible OFF enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D19 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D20 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D21 (green) For debugging use (Normally unlit)
D22 (green) For debugging use (Lit during scanning)/Unlit otherwise
D23 (green) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON)
D24 (green) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON)
D25 (green) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON)
D27 (red) Lit when the high-voltage switch is turned ON/
Unlit when the high-voltage switch is turned OFF
CN10
Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
(green and orange)

D27
PRIT103003.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-18


MD-19
3.5 Checking the Voltage n PSU27B Board
u INSTRUCTION u
3.5.1 Checking the Voltage of Replace the board if the power supply voltage is out of the standard range at a measurement
point.
the PSU27B Board/PSU27A Board Power Source
Measurement Voltage standard Adjustment
n Board Location and Measurement Points Voltage
point range value
+24 V TP8 23.0 to 25.0 V 24.5 V
+5 V TP2 4.8 to 5.2 V 5.1 V
+15 V TP3 14.4 to 15.6 V 15.25 V
+12 V TP1 11.5 to 12.5 V 12.0 V
-15 V TP4 -15.6 to -14.1 V -15.25 V

n PSU27A Power Source


Power Supply
(PSU27A) u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Voltage adjustment is not necessary.
- Voltage output range: +21.6 to 26.4 V (±10%) between the 5 and 8 pins and between the 1
PSU27B board and 4 pins of the CN51.

TP8 TP1 TP2 TP4 TP3


PRIT103005.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-19


MD-20

4. Descriptions of n IP Conveyance

Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation m CPU board; Setting of reading conditions
Conditions are set according to a combination of the IP size, the IP type, the reading
mode that is preset with the Console (exposure menu), and the reading mode (FR/GR)
that is preset with CONFIGURATION.
4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence
m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics
REFERENCE m Laser (LD); ON
The I/O names (CPU board, polygon (POL), etc.) in the following sequence correspond to
the I/O names in illustration of the scanner controller unit, and are denoted in the form of: n IP Moved to the Subscanning Unit
m I/O name; description of operation for that I/O name m Leading-edge sensor (SED); IP leading-edge detection
[Example] m CPU board; Correction data initial setting Detects the laser light reflected from the IP.
This means that the CPU board performs initial setting of the correction data. m PMT board, CPU board; Start of image reading
{MD:4.3_Image Data Flow}
n Machine Power ON
m Grip release motor (MZ2); Gripping/releasing of driving shaft/driven shaft
m CPU board; Correction data initial setting m Trailing edge detection (SED); The trailing edge of the IP is detected
m CPU board; Scanner self-diagnostics (completion of reading is detected)
{MD:4.4_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
n Reading Termination Processing
n Cassette Loading
m Laser (LD); OFF
m Polygon (POL); Start m Polygon (POL); Stop
Since it takes time for the polygon to get stable, it is started at the same time as the
cassette is loaded. m High voltage power supply (HV); Idling
m CPU board; Erasing level detection, error determination, change-of-
S-value detection

n IP Moved to the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide


The IP moves to the post-reading conveyance guide, and the reading operation is
complete.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-20


MD-21
4.2 Correction Data
Shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data, and speed correction data are located
in the FLASH ROM on the CPU board. The data is copied into the SDRAM when the power
of the machine is turned ON, and used in operation.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-21


MD-22
4.3 Image Data Flow Laser light Scanning
optics unit
The flow of image data is described below. [Photomultiplier]
Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2), and so Light-collecting PMT board
forth in the image data flow illustration. guide
It should be noted that the image data is sent to the Console nearly concurrently with LOG amp
reading. (1) Luminescence
(1) When the laser light from the scanning optics unit hits the IP, it becomes
data reading HV
IP
luminescence data, which is read by the photomultiplier through the light-
collecting guide.

(2) The resulting data is sent, in the form of analog data, from the photomultiplier
board (PMT board) to the CPU board. (2) Transfer in analog form

(3) Analog data is converted to digital data (AD conversion) on the CPU board.

(4) Digital data is output to the DSP via the FIFO, and subjected to image processing CPU board
and shading correction. Thereafter, it is temporarily stored in the SDRAM on the
CPU board.

(5) The image data stored in the SDRAM is sent to the Console via the network under (3) A/D conversion
control of the main CPU located on the CPU board.

FIFO

DSP
(4)
Image processing,
shading correction

Printer SDRAM
(5)
Console Transfer to Console
Laser light and luminescence data
Analog data
Digital data PRIT104001.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-22


MD-23
4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem
(1) Error code
The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the control
signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to facilitate
identification of their causes.

(2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics


(A) Polygon start
(B) Laser ON
(C) Scanner self-diagnostics
Spurious current is made to flow, and reading takes place. Whether the reading
can correctly take place is also checked.
(D) Laser OFF
(E) Error check for self-diagnostics

(3) Polygon diagnostics


It is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a predetermined time
after the polygon is started.

(4) Error detection during reading


During reading, an error caused by a timeout is detected.

(5) Check after reading is completed


In order to check whether abnormal is found with reading operation, error check is
performed upon completion of reading.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-23


MD-24

5. Descriptions of 5.2 Conveyance Operation


Mechanical Components and Their Operations This section describes the operations that the sensors and mechanisms perform during IP
feed.

5.1 IP Conveyance Flow 5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation

Cassette set unit Erasure unit Conveyor Unit l Sensor status prevailing before cassette insertion
Cassette
[1]

[5] [4]

[3]

[2]

Scanning
optics unit

Post-reading Light-collecting Subscanning unit


conveyor unit unit
PRIT105001.ai

Function Description
Opens the cover of the cassette that is inserted into the
Feeds an IP from a
[1] cassette.
cassette set unit. Feeds an IP from a cassette and conveys it
after measuring IP size.

[2] Reads an image. Reads an image that is recorded on the IP.


*1 : The SA9 is provided only for the machine supporting pantomography.
[3] Conveys the IP. Transfers the IP, whose image has been read.

[4] Erases an image. Erases an image that is recorded on the IP.


Loads an IP into a Loads the IP, whose image has been erased, into the cassette,
[5] cassette. and ejects the cassette.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-24


MD-25
l Cassette insertion and cassette size determination l Cassette entry detection, cassette hold, and cassette cover opening operation
When the cassette is inserted into its position, the shutter opens and the cassette ejection When the cassette is inserted to the cassette cover opening pin, the cassette cover opens
senser (SA4) closes. and the cassette IN sensor (SA1) closes.
Also, the movable guide assembly and 15x30 cassette movable guide assembly lowers in When the SA1 closes, the cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turns OFF and the cassette
accordance with cassette size to open/close the small cassette size sensor (SA8) and the hold sensor (SA2) opens. Consequently, it is detected that the cassette is held.
“15x30 IP width” identifying sensor (SA9).
The size of the inserted cassette is determined in accordance with the OPEN/CLOSE status
of the SA8 and SA9.
Cassette size SA8 SA9
15x30 (cm) cassette OPEN OPEN
Small cassette size:
OPEN CLOSE
10x12 (inch), 8x10 (inch), 24x30 (cm), 18x24 (cm)
Large cassette size:
CLOSE CLOSE
14x17 (inch), 14x14 (inch), 35x43 (cm), 35x35 (cm)

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-25


MD-26
l Side-positioning guides operation l IP suction
Side-positioning guides lower in accordance with each cassette size, determined by SA8 and At the same time the side-positioning guide(s) lower(s), the IP removal arm moves from its
SA9. home position and the SA3 opens.
All of the side-positioning guides are lifted up (HP) when the IP protrusion prevention sensor At this time, the IP removal arm pushes up the cassette cover while moving to the suction
(SA6) and the side-positioning detection sensor (SA7) open at the same time. position.
Every time the SA7 changes its status from OPEN to CLOSE, and then to OPEN again, each The IP is sucked by the IP suction pump (PA1) and the suction cup. The IP removal arm,
side-positioning guide lower in the following order: when sucking the IP, moves it to the conveyance start position.
- Side-positioning guide for IP protrusion prevention
- Side-positioning guide for 15x30 cassette
- Side-positioning guide for small-size cassette
- Side-positioning guide for large-size cassette and side-positioning guide on the reference side
The side-positioning guides return to their home position when the shaft of the side-
positioning guide assembly rotates 180 degrees in the status where all the guides are
lowered.

<When the IP is to be vacuum-retained>


The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF. The PA1 operates so that the suction cup
vacuum-retains the IP.

<When IP suction relief is to be provided>


The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns ON. This provides IP suction relief.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-26


MD-27
l IP side-positioning 5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation
When the IP removal arm moves IP to its conveyance position, the IP is side-positioned to
the reference position by being pressed against the side-positioning guide.
l From reading to erasure of images
Images on the IP are read by the laser light exposed from the scanning optics unit and by the
light-collecting guide when the IP passes above the center roller.
The IP which has been read is conveyed to the erasure unit. Images on the IP are erased
when the IP passes through the erasure unit.

l IP suction and restoration into the cassette


The IP removal arm moves to the IP suction position to suck the IP when the IP is restored
into the cassette. At this time, the SA3 opens because the IP removal arm moves from its
home position. When the IP removal arm moves to the suction position, the IP suction pump
turns ON and sucks the IP. After the suction, IP is restored into the cassette by the IP removal
arm.

l IP conveyance
The IP removal arm moves to the IP conveyance position while sucking the IP and leaks the
IP from the suction cup.
After the IP is released, the IP removal arm moves to its home position and SA3 closes.
On the way the IP is moved to the conveyance position, the length of the IP is measured
based on the time from when the IP length measurement sensor (SA5) closes until when the
SA5 opens again.
Also, when the IP sensor 1 (SC3) closes, the IP conveyance speed changes from the normal
conveyance speed to the reading conveyance speed.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-27


MD-28
l Moving the IP removal arm to its hope position and releasing the cassette hold l Removing the cassette
After releasing the IP, the IP removal arm returns to the home position, and the SA3 closes. When the cassette is removed, the cassette cover is automatically closed by the cassette
When the SA3 closes, the SOLA1 turns ON and the cassette hold is released. The cassette cover closing roller.
hold arm lowers as the SOLA1 turns ON. Consequently, the SA2 closes. Cassette ejection sensor (SA4) opens when the shutter closes, and the removal of the
After the cassette hold is released, the cassette can be removed. cassette is detected.
Also, SA1, SA8, and SA9 return to the state before the cassette is inserted.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-28


MD-29
5.3 Erasure Unit 5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading
The cam coordinating with the MZ2 drives the nip arm to grip the IP and release the IP for
l Erasing Images the purpose of conveying and reading the IP.
The IP is conveyed between the lamp assembly and the reflective plate, and the IP image If the IP shifts due to the vibration of the motor or oscillation of the machine during the IP
erasure is performed when IP is loaded. reading, abnormalities in images might result.

5.4 Subscanning Unit

5.4.1 IP Reading
When the IP passes over the center roller, laser light is radiated from the scanning optics
unit.
When the laser radiated from the scanning optics unit comes against the IP, the image
recorded on the IP emits light. The light emitted from the IP is directly collected on the light-
collecting guide.
The light collected on the light-collecting guide is fed to the photomultiplier (PMT board) and
processed as image data.
The configuration of the scanning optics unit, the light-collecting guide, and the rollers is as
follows.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-29


MD-30
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-30


MD-31
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-31


Control Sheet
Isuue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5870) All pages
03.15.2012 03 Revision (FM6003) 38-43
12.01.2012 04 Revision (FM6113) 19

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Troubleshooting (MT)

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


MT-1

1. Overview of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications


RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:

1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code


1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the Console screen to display
an error code upon error detection
Trouble occurred
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console
Console-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
Checking the Error Log
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:1.2.1_Checking the Error Log} Errors that result in image abnormalities due to a scratched IP, laser light blockage caused
by dust, or electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to
detect an error code
{MT:1.2_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Errors that occur due to a CPU board, interrupt the progress of a process, and cause the
inability to detect an error code
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU board due to an improper
FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting

3. Errors causing image abnormalities

4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code


and the inability of the machine to boot

5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-1


MT-2
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-out
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about errors
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of error encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
codes. If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered during
troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information. Therefore, you may
START lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s use of the machine.

n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log


When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code displayed
on the Console represents the last-encountered error.
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the encountered
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.

Back up the ERROR LOG and CONFIGURAION.

{MU:1.16_BACKUP}

Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.

{MU:1.19_ERROR DB}

END

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-2


MT-3
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
(1) Group the errors that occurred.
occurrence timing.
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that
occurred first). l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the Console
Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
(Example)
indications.
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence groups,
because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 minutes. Error Occurrence
- The first error in Group A is "12302". code date
n When an Error Occurred after "Time Data" Was Acquired from the Console 12256 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
12255 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00258D tiphscan____
Error codes displayed on the Console screen 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Perform troubleshooting with this error
Error code that occurred last code. FRRB201003.ai

Error code that l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the Console
A
occurred second The resulting "occurrence date/time" indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Code of the error Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position
that occurred first. (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
B Perform The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
troubleshooting
with this error Error Occurrence Occurrence
code. code date time
FRRB201001.ai
10300 0000.00.00 00:00:19 00257D tiphscan____
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817 Error code that occurred second
n When an Error Occurred before "Time Data" Was Acquired from the 10302 0000.00.00 00:00:10 00258D tiphscan____
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Console Perform troubleshooting with this error
code.
Error codes displayed on the Console screen
FRRB201004.ai

n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred First


Error code that occurred last
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the
Error code that
A error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be
occurred second
accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered
Code of the error
trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting.
that occurred first.
Perform
B
troubleshooting
with this error
code.
FRRB201002.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-3


MT-4
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table
When the error causing the failure is identified, see the “Probable Cause and Remedy” in the
error code table, and proceed with the operation.

n Error Code Table Description


The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence
conditions.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-4


MT-5
n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1XYZZ 1:
2:
Image processing CPU
Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
00 to 99: Reference number for each error category
4: Overall control
0 to 9: Error category
5: Network control
0 to 4: Error level
6: Scanner control (for back side)
1: 1 for all RU errors
FRRB201005.ai
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
l X: Error level 9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
Error level notations
FATAL error: 0
l ZZ: Reference number
- The user is notified of an error occurrence. It is managed according to each error category.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette or IP,
etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary
to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time with
another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-5


MT-6
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made with
the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON.
The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned ON
while the high-voltage switch is ON.

(1) Remove the cover.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover

(2) Remove the board box cover.


{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}

(3) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the CPU board.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-6


MT-7

2. Error Code Table


Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10001 File open error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.

[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10002 File read error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.

[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10003 File format error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.

[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU
- Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
board into the DRAM,
10004 File write error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM.
- Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
- Replace the CPU board.
Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the
DRAM.

[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10005 File close error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-7


MT-8

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10210 SED board power supply error An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Replace the SED board.
edge detection (SED) board was detected. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup]
HV high voltage power supply - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
error of range. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10222 PMT 15V voltage error An error is detected for the PMT analog power supply signal - Replace the PMT board.
(+15VOKH, 15VOKL). - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the fuses of the CPU board. Replace the PSU27A power
supply, the PSU27B board and the CPU board if the fuse blowout
recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
of range when HV is on. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-8


MT-9

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10243 Polygon lock timeout (2nd) The polygon OK signal cannot be detected (twice) within the - Replace the scanning optics unit.
specified time after turning on the polygon. - Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10250 Leading edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the leading edge did not occur - Replace the SED board.
within the specified time. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the error log for other errors. If any error occurs, analyze it.
- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10252 Image read error The image reading error occurred. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

[During bootup or routine processing]


10253 FIFO overflow The image buffer FIFO was overflowed.
- Replace the CPU board.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-9


MT-10

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During routine processing]
10287 Light-shielding check It was detected that the QL value was 80 or more when - Check the installation of the plate.
detecting S-value shift.

[During bootup]
- Check for abnormalities in installing the cassette hold mechanism.
The cassette width sensors detected an abnormal
- Check the detecting area of the sensor (SA2) for smears.
combination when the cassette set unit performed a cassette
Cassette hold sensor - Reseat the sensor (SA2) connector.
10311 hold operation. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no
combination inconsistency cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2)
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detected a cassette hold (CLOSED). The cassette ejection - Replace the sensors.
sensor (SA4) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).

[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators (SA1 and SA11).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette sensor combination
10312 an abnormal combination. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
inconsistency (1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA4) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). - Replace the sensors.

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


[During bootup or routine processing] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism was - Check if the motor is working.
performed, it was unable to detect that the HP sensor (SA6) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10322 Side-positioning driving error was CLOSED. Although retries were performed, the sensor - Check the SND board fuses.
status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the - Replace the sensors or the motors.
error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-10


MT-11

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
[During bootup or routine processing]
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism was
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed, it was unable to detect that the side-positioning
10323 Side-positioning overrun sensor (SA7) was OPENED. Or it detected that both the HP
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
sensor (SA6) and the side-positioning sensor (SA7) were
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
CLOSED.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


[During bootup or routine processing]
- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
When a suction arm home positioning operation was
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
performed, the suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven.
Suction arm home positioning However, it was impossible to detect that the suction arm HP
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10336 - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error sensor (SA3) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries
- Check the SND board fuses.
were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/
stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 or 12491 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-11


MT-12

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
cassette IN sensor and cassette ejection sensor in the - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette size sensor
10340 cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The - Reseat the SND board connectors.
combination error (2) cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that no cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
was present (OPEN). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Replace the sensors.
detected a cassette (CLOSED).

[When a conveyance error occurs]


- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During bootup] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven. However, the [When no conveyance error occurs]
Remaining IP conveyance error
10349 IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the housing unit or the IP length sensor - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
(sub scanning) (SA5) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time (did - Reseat the sensor connectors.
not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed - Reseat the SND board connectors.
in the subscanning unit. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[During bootup]
- Update the version to the newest version.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
10359 Remaining IP search error transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven. However, one
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)
of the motor had an error.

- Update the version to the newest version.


[During bootup or routine processing]
10373 Cassette hold release error An error was detected when releasing the cassette hold.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


[During bootup or routine processing]
10379 Cassette hold error An error was detected when holding cassette.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-12


MT-13

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Reseat connectors of the motor, valve, and pump.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the SND board connectors.
Driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA1), turning on/off - Check for air leakage from the air hose during the IP suction operation.
10389 Feed IP suction error of the IP leak valve (SVA1) and turning on of the IP suction
pump (PA1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. - Update the version to the newest version.
Error was detected in either operation. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[During bootup or routine processing]


Turning off of the leak valve (SVA1), driving of the suction arm - Update the version to the newest version.
10390 Feed IP error driving motor (MA3), and driving of the the IP transport motors - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MC1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. Error update. (For design analysis)
was detected in either operation.

[During routine processing]


Turning on of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the - Update the version to the newest version.
10392 Feed IP leak error suction switching valve (SVA2) and turning off of the IP suction - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
pump (PA1) were performed in the feed-leak operation. An update. (For design analysis)
error was detected in either operation.

[During routine processing]


- Update the version to the newest version.
The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in
10396 Feed IP conveyance error feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)
error.

[During routine processing]


Feed IP conveyance retry - Update the version to the newest version.
10397 The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were stopped in feed- - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
stopped error conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an error. update. (For design analysis)

[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.


10414 Subscanning conveyance error The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
reading conveyance, and one of the motors had an error. update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-13


MT-14

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.

[When no conveyance error occurs]


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors (SA5) for smears.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor (SA5) connectors.
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10420 Erasure conveyance error perform an IP erasure conveyance operation. However, the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]


- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[During routine processing] - Check for abnormalities or debrises with the sensors.
After the cassette IP suction was released, the IP length
sensor (SA5) detected an IP (CLOSED). Therefore, retries [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
10422 Load IP drop (1) were performed. However, the maximum retry count was - Update the version to the newest version.
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MA1). update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-14


MT-15

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.

[When no conveyance error occurs]


[During bootup or routine processing]
- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven.
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
However, IP length sensor (SA5) in the housing unit did
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10435 IP conveyance error not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
predetermined period of time. It is conceivable that the IP may
- Check the SND board fuses.
be jammed between the erasure unit and conveyor unit. Or,
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven in the operation - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller of positioning the subscanning grip roller to the reference - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10444
positioning error side before IP search, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) - Check the SND board fuses.
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
detected when driving/stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-15


MT-16

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
[During bootup or routine processing]
- Check if the motor is working.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate
Subscanning grip roller free - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10445 the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor
rotation error (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
was detected when driving/stopping the motor.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]


- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


[During routine processing] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller home- the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10446
positioning error the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the - Check the SND board fuses.
specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ - Replace the sensors or the motors.
stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-16


MT-17

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
[During routine processing]
- Check if the motor is working.
In the operation of rejecting grip, the subscanning grip motor
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10447 Rejection grip roller error (MZ2) was driven, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2)
- Check the SND board fuses.
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
detected when driving/stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
[During bootup or routine processing]
Side-positioning HP sensor After the HP return of the side-positioning/IP jump prevention
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10457 - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error mechanism was performed, it was detected that the side-
- Check the SND board fuses.
positioning sensor (SA7) was CLOSED.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]


- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.


[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10458 Cassette size sensor error Due to a logical error in the cassette width sensor (SA8 and - Reseat the SND board connectors.
SA9), a cassette width cannot be identified. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Replace the sensors.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-17


MT-18

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.

[During routing processing]


[When no conveyance error occurs]
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to
Post-reading conveyance error perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10462 - Check the SND board fuses.
(2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, error
was detected when driving one of the motors.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.


10472 Roller grip 2 release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.


10473 Roller 2 grip error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for engaging the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.


10474 Roller 1 grip release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing error the grip of roller 1. update. (For design analysis)

External erasure data [During bootup] - Update the version to the newest version.
10710
acquisition error It failed to read the erasure data file. - Replace the CPU board.

[During bootup] - Reseat the INV board connectors.


It was found that the INV board was not mounted in the - Reseat the SND board connectors (CN5 and CN6).
10731 INV board position error correct position. For the correct board position, refer to the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
MD volume. - Replace the INV board.

[During bootup]
Configuration initialization
10900 The Iconfiguration data (Irset.cfg) could not be loaded into the - Again set the configuration information in EDIT CONFIGURATION.
failure SDRAM from the flash ROM on the CPU board.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-18


MT-19

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Check that the CPU board DIP switch (S7) is set as specified in the
specifications.
{MC:4.6.3_Replacing the CPU Board_
[During bootup] n Reinstallation Procedures}
10904 RU type error The RU type acquired by DIPSW of CPU board was not CR- - Execute "Initialize APL" of the CPU board.
IR392. {MU:1.23_Initialize APL}
- Update the version to the newest version.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
[During bootup]
Image signal monitor value immediately after replacement of the fuses.
11200 When diagnosing the simulated data transfer, the A/D - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
(simulated current) error conversion data for simulated image were out of range. - Replace the PMT board.
- Replace the CPU board.

[During bootup] - Replace the scanning optics unit.


LD drive current value error - Check that there is no excessive rise in the ambient temperature.
11230 The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times
(during bootup) the factory default value.
The laser drive current value (LDIF) is affected by the ambient
temperature.

[During routine processing]


The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity (±50 to - Carry out sensitivity correction.
11270 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and
±70%) (WND&LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
- Replace the light-collecting guide.

±70%.

[During routine processing]


Shifted sensitivity (70% or The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK - Carry out sensitivity correction.
11271
more) (WND&LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it - Replace the light-collecting guide.
was detected if the value was ±70% or more.

[During bootup]
- Turn ON the HV switch of the CPU board. Check that the red LED
11280 Initialization HV-OFF status It was found that the high voltage of the photomultiplier (PMT on the upper right of the switch is lit.
board) was OFF.

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-19


MT-20

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When the cassette is set in the RU]
- Remove the cassette.

[During bootup]
Bootup improper cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11315 It was found that a cassette was improperly loaded (inserted
loading detection obliquely or into a nonreference position).
- Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1, SA4, SA8 and SA9)
normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Replace the sensors.

[When the cassette is set in the RU]


- Remove the cassette.
[During bootup]
It was found that a cassette was incompletely inserted. The
Bootup incomplete cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11316 cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
insertion detection present (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
that a cassette was present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Replace the sensors.

[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that a cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11341 present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (1) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
was released (CLOSED).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).

[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11342 present (OPEN). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (2) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
(OPEN).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-20


MT-21

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During routine processing]
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette
hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Although retries - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
11373 Cassette hold retry error were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. An - Check the SND board fuses.
error results also when the following operation takes place. - Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
- When the cassette is loaded upside down;
- When the cassette is loaded front side back.

[During routine processing]


- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette
11375 Cassette not detected hold). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no
- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
- Replace the sensors.
cassette was present (OPEN).

[During routine processing]


The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
11379 Cassette hold release error release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Although retries were - Replace the sensors.
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During routine processing]
It was found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was OPEN (did
[When the mechanism normally works]
11390 Feed IP suction error not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak
- Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
sequence. Although an IP feed operation was retried, the
- Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.

[When a conveyance error occurs]


- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing]
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to
perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor
11397 Feed IP conveyance error (2) 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect
[When no conveyance error occurs]
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-21


MT-22

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.

[When no conveyance error occurs]


[During routine processing] - Check the SND board fuses.
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to - Replace the sensor (SC3) or the motors.
11413 Leading-edge detection error perform a reading conveyance operation. However, the - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
leading-edge detection interrupt did not occur within a the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
predetermined period of time. immediately after replacement of the fuses.
- Reseat the SED board connectors.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Replace the CPU board.

[When a conveyance error occurs]


- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to
Subscanning conveyance error
11414 perform a reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor [When no conveyance error occurs]
(1) 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When a conveyance error occurs]


- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing]
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to
Subscanning conveyance error perform a reading conveyance operation. As a result, a
11415 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(2) leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN within a monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
predetermined period of time. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-22


MT-23

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing]
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MZ1/MC1) were driven for a reading
Subscanning conveyance error conveyance operation, and a leading-edge detection interrupt
11416 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(3) occurred. The IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit became
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
OPEN, but a tailing-edge detection interrupt did not occur monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
within the specified time. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[During bootup]
Empty cassette ejection When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an - Remove the cassette.
11454
request empty cassette was detected. It was therefore requested that - Make sure that no IP remains inside the machine.
the cassette be ejected.

[During routine processing]


Insufficient erasure due to over The over X-ray dose was detected in the erasure mode
- Again erase the IP.
11480 - Confirm the S value, and carry out sensitivity correction when
X-ray dose processing, so the message was displayed and the needed.
insufficiently erased IP was returned to the cassette.

[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11495 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.

[During bootup]
Request for an empty cassette When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the
11498 -
having a specified size insertion of an empty cassette having a specified size was
requested.

[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11499 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.

11510 Unread IP ejection The IP was ejected into the cassette without being read. -

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-23


MT-24

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
<User operation>
This error occurs if no menu is selected at the time of image
Patient information not output.
11511 -
registered <Occurrence condition analysis>
The patient information relevant to the processed IP was not
registered in the CL.

11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL -

[During routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
An attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data connection between the CL and RU.
11531 Retransmission retry failure from the RU to the CL after communication with the CL is - Check that the IP address of the “master CL” set in the RU is correct.
suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
is lost and the cassette is ejected.

Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate. Therefore, the


Erasure time extension due message appeared, and a process was performed in the
- Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11700 to erasure lamp illumination erasure extension mode in which the erasure time was recurs.
failure extended. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.

A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate.


Inadequate erasure due to The erasure degeneration mode then prevailed due to
inadequate erasure. An unerased IP was ejected into the - Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11701 erasure lamp illumination cassette. The message appeared and the user made a mode recurs.
failure selection. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.

A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination


Erasure lamp life end advance time (1272 hours) was exceeded. Therefore, the message
11702 - Replace the lamp assembly.
notice appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is about to be
reached.

The life end warning message appeared because a


11703 Erasure lamp life end 1 predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time (1300 - Replace the lamp assembly.
hours) was exceeded.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-24


MT-25

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
The life end message appeared because a predetermined
11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 cumulative erasure lamp illumination time (1314 hours) was - Replace the lamp assembly.
exceeded.

Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an INV board


Erasure time extension due to - Replace the INV board. Replace the lamp assembly if the failure
11732 failure. Therefore, the erasure time was extended. For the recurs.
INV board failure number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.

A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate


due to an INV board failure. The erasure degeneration mode
Erasure degeneration due to - Replace the INV board. Replace the lamp assembly if the failure
11733 then prevailed, and an unerased IP was ejected into the recurs.
INV board failure cassette. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.

An IP that was inadequately erased due, for instance, to an


- Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11760 Inadequately erased IP ejection erasure lamp illumination failure was returned to the cassette, recurs.
and the cassette was ejected.

Erasure lamp cleaning preliminary message was displayed


Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11780 since the number of days since the last cleaning date or the - Clean the erasure filter.
preliminary message number of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.

Erasure lamp cleaning warning message was displayed since


Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11781 the number of days since the last cleaning date or the number - Clean the erasure filter.
warning of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.

The message appeared and the error was logged because


Erasure lamp filter life end the life end of the erasure lamp filter was reached, that is,
11904 - Replace the erasure filter.
indication an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded.
Replace the lamp filter.

The message appeared and the error was logged because


the life end of the IP suction pump was reached, that is, an
11905 IP suction pump life end IP conveyance count of 135,000 (3 years) was exceeded.
- Replace the IP suction pump.

Replace the pump.

The message appeared because a predetermined cumulative


11906 Laser life end laser illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace the scanning optics unit.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-25


MT-26

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During shutdown processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
Log information save error connection between the CL and RU.
11907 An error occurred when an attempt was made to save error
during shutdown process log/trace information in the FTP server.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.

Cassette insertion before The message appeared and the cassette was ejected
11950 console connection because the cassette was inserted before the connection to -

establishment the console was established.

The message appeared because the cassette was not


inserted all the way in and two seconds elapsed.
An error results also when the following operation takes place.
- When the cassette is slantly loaded;
11951 Cassette setting failure - When the cassette is inserted into an opposite side to
-

reference;
- When a cassette of an inch type is loaded into a metric-type
machine.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
[During MUTL operation]
12001 File open error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file open sequence.
connection between the CL and RU.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
[During MUTL operation]
12004 File write error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file write sequence.
connection between the CL and RU.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

[During routine processing]


SED board power supply error
12210 An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Take action when the error code 10210 occurs.
(during routine processing) edge detection (SED) board was detected.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-26


MT-27

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During routine processing]
HV high voltage power supply
12220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10220 occurs.
error of range.

[During routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.


An error about the HV detection value signal of PMT board - Replace the PMT board.
Difference value error of HV
12221 was detected. The difference between the minimum and - Replace the PSU27A power supply.
high voltage power supply maximum monitor values is out of range when compared to - Replace the PSU27B board.
the setting value. - Replace the CPU board.

[During routine processing]


12223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10223 occurs.
of range when HV is on.

- Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.


[During routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
12231 LD monitor value error warning The difference between minimum and maximum of the laser - Replace the PSU27A power supply.
drive current monitor value is out of specification. - Replace the PSU27B board.
- Replace the CPU board.

- Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.


- Replace the scanning optics unit.
[During routine processing]
12233 LD light intensity error The laser light intensity is less than 50%.
- Replace the PSU27A power supply.
- Replace the PSU27B board.
- Replace the CPU board.

[During routine processing]


12240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count.
- Take action when the error code 10240 occurs.

- Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.


[During bootup or routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
SYN interval count difference
12241 The difference between the minimum and maximum SYN - Replace the PSU27A power supply.
value error interval counts during reading was out of the specified range. - Replace the PSU27B board.
- Replace the CPU board.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-27


MT-28

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup or routine processing]
The interrupt status occurred as there was an error of interval
12242 Polygon improper index for the index signal, which is generated for every rotation of
- Same as the error code 10243.

polygon.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12243 Polygon lock timeout (1st) After polygon "ON", the polygon "OK" signal cannot detect - Same as the error code 10243.
within predetermined period of time (1st time).

[During bootup or routine processing]


12244 Polygon lock error An error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is - Same as the error code 10243.
detected.

Polygon surface counter [During bootup or routine processing]


12245 - Same as the error code 10243.
timeout The interrupt was not notified within 150 ms of LD ON.

[During routine processing]


12251 Trailing edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the tailing edge did not occur within -
the specified time.

[During routine processing]


The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity (±50 to
12270 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
±70%) (LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
±70%.

[During routine processing]


Shifted sensitivity (70% or The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
12271 - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
more) (LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it
was detected in case the value was ±70% or more.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12286 Scanner retry The operation of the polygon or HV ON was retried.
-

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-28


MT-29

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
[During bootup or routine processing]
- Check if the motor is working.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
12322 Side-positioning driving retry was performed, the HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE within
- Check the SND board fuses.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
performed.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.

[When the mechanism normally works]


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
12323 Side-positioning overrun retry performed, the side-positioning sensor (SA7) did not OPEN - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Check the SND board fuses.
performed. - Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]


- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-29


MT-30

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During bootup or routine processing]
The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12336
retry (1) However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not CLOSE - Reseat the sensor connectors.
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During bootup or routine processing]
The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12337
retry (2) the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not CLOSE within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During bootup or routine processing]
The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12338
retry the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not OPEN within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-30


MT-31

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During routine processing]
- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
12373 Cassette hold retry hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that
- Check the SND board fuses.
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Therefore, a retry
- Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
was performed.

[During routine processing]


Cassette undetected in cassette The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
12376
hold sequence hold). However, the cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected - Replace the sensors.
that no cassette was present (OPEN).

[During routine processing]


The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
12379 Cassette hold release retry release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Therefore, a retry - Replace the sensors.
was performed.

[During bootup or routine processing]


When a suction arm home position was checked, it was found
12383 Suction arm home positioning that the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) was OPEN. Therefore,
-

the suction arm was returned to its home position.

[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]


- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During routine processing]
It was found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was OPEN (did [When the mechanism normally works]
12390 Feed IP suction retry not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak - Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
sequence. Therefore, an IP feed operation was retried. - Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
- Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-31


MT-32

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[When a conveyance error occurs]
- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing]
- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP
12397 Feed IP conveyance retry (2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE within
[When no conveyance error occurs]
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

- Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and light-
emitting regions).
[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
After an IP suction release operation was performed, it was
12422 Load IP drop retry (1) found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (due to IP
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When a conveyance error occurs]


- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During routine processing] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP [When no conveyance error occurs]
12474 Feed IP conveyance error (3) sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.

performed. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.


- Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

[When the error 13485 concurrently occurs]


- Not problem. No countermeasure is necessary.

12485 Pulse motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the pulse motor. [When the error does not concurrently occur with the error 13485]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-32


MT-33

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Update the version to the newest version.
12486 DC motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the DC motor. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


12487 Sensor error Error occurred when acquiring the sensor status. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


12488 Fuse error Error occurred when acquiring the fuse condition. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


12489 Solenoid error Error occurred when turning on/off the solenoid. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


12490 Pump error Error occurred when turning on/off the pump. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


12491 Valve error Error occurred when turning on/off the valve. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[During bootup or routine processing]


12510 Message format error An illegal command was received from the CL.
-

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12520 Message transmission failure An attempt to transmit a message from the RU to the CL connection between the CL and RU.
failed. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing]
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
A REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however,
12521 RES message receiving timeout RU cannot receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in
connection between the CL and RU.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
a time-out. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-33


MT-34

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12522 ACK receiving time-out A message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot connection between the CL and RU.
receive ACK, thus resulting in a time-out. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

[During routine processing]


Although the SET command was transmitted from the RU, a
SET command CL receiving signal other than OK was received as a response from the
12523 -
error CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, the cassette
is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU
panel.

[During bootup or routine processing]


Unlit erasure lamp detection - Update the version to the newest version.
12750 An error was detected when acquiring the status of lamp - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
error being unlit. update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


[During bootup or routine processing]
12753 Erasure lamp turning off error An error was detected when turning off the erasure lamps.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

- Update the version to the newest version.


[During bootup or routine processing]
12754 Erasure lamp lighting error An error was detected when turning on the erasure lamps.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

[During bootup or routine processing]


It was detected that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 1
12770 INV board port 1 failure was blown. For the INV board location and port numbers,
- Replace the INV board.

refer to the MD volume.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12803 Blown fuse F4 of SND board It was detected that the fuse F4 of SND board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12808 Blown fuse F9 of SND board It was detected that the fuse F9 of SND board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12809 Blown fuse F10 of SND board It was detected that the fuse F10 of SND board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-34


MT-35

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup or routine processing]
12817 Blown fuse F7 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F7 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12818 Blown fuse F10 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F10 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12822 Blown fuse F13 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F13 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

[During bootup or routine processing]


12825 Blown fuse F19 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F19 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing]
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
The FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from
12990 FTP server access error the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a
connection between the CL and RU.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
connection cannot be established. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

[During routine processing]


13230 Laser drive current value error The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times - Take action when the error code 10230 or 11906 occurs.
the factory default value.

[During bootup or routine processing]


Updating the drive current
13232 The drive current maximum value was more than the total of -
maximum value initial current value maximum value + specified value.

[During MUTL operation]


- Carry out shading correction by means of a 14 x 17 inch (35 x 43 cm)
13281 Reading IP size error The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for or 14 x 14 inch (35 x 35 cm) IP.
shading correction, so that error is detected.

[During MUTL operation]


SHD/POLYGON correction data It failed to create the correction data as the difference between
13282 - Carry out shading correction by means of a scratch-free IP.
error the minimum and maximum QL values of the shading data
exceeded the specified value.

[During MUTL operation] - Carry out sensitivity correction by means of IPs exposed to doses of
13283 HVCNT value error An out-of-spec HV is inputted. 1 mR to 10 mR.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-35


MT-36

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During MUTL operation]
13284 Format adjustment data error When format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is -
inputted.

[During MUTL operation]


13285 File restore error An error occurred when restoring the SCN data.
- Check that file extension is “.dat”.

[During MUTL operation]


13288 SHD data write error It failed to write the SHD data into the Flash ROM.
- Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.

[During MUTL operation]


Correction recording
13289 It failed to create the shading correction data. Shading - Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.
calculation cancel correction should be performed again.

- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.


[During bootup] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
Bootup cassette sensor The cassette IN sensor (SA1), cassette hold sensor (SA2), - Reseat the sensor connectors.
13312
combination inconsistency cassette OUT sensor (SA4) and cassette size sensor (SA8 - Reseat the SND board connectors.
and SA9) detected an abnormal combination. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Replace the sensors.

Stop command for the stopped Although the motor was already stopped, a command for
13485 -
motor stopping was sent.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing]
Detection of communication - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13520 It is detected that the communication between the CL and the connection between the CL and RU.
abortion to CL RU is broken. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
[During bootup or routine processing] and the hub.
The connection is suspended and initialization of
CL communication failure - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13521 communication between the CL and RU is performed again, connection between the CL and RU.
detected because the communication between the CL and RU is - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
broken.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-36


MT-37

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the
RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
13530 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
due to hardware failure of the network, thereby causing connection between the CL and RU.
frequent retries.

- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
[During bootup]
FTP server data acquisition - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13900 The data cannot be gotten from FTP server and it is set to an connection between the CL and RU.
failure initial value. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-37


MT-38

3. Detail Code
The error log contains detail code associated with the error that occurred.
If the category of an error is either "3: Conveyance control" or "4: Overall control", a detail
code is displayed.

3.1 How to Understand Detail Code

SC3
SA1∼9

[11495] 2011/12/16 10:32:39.83 @ 101100001:0::a - - - - - - - - c/00000000/1/-


[12422] 2011/12/09 09:06:31.55 @ 101110001:0::a40000008c/00000000/1/2

Error code Occurrence Sensor status Barcode Reserved


date (Fixed) Shelf
(Fixed)
IP size
PRT030203001.ai

l Sensor status
0: OPEN
1: CLOSE

l IP size
0. 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm)
1. 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm)
2. 10" x 12"
3. 8" x 10"
4. 18 cm x 24 cm
5. 24 cm x 30 cm
8. 15 cm x 30 cm

l Barcode
- - - - - - - : Before detecting the IP size
40000008 : After detecting the IP size

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-38


MT-39

4. Abnormal Images No.2


Image nonuniformity
(entire 5 mm-pitch nonuniformity)
[Possible cause]
A scratch or crack is present on the gear of
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP the subscanning motor (MZ1).
4.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images

n Image Nonuniformity (Horizontal Streaks in the Subscanning Direction)


Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]
No.1
(25 mm-pitch nonuniformity) A scratch or crack is present on the spur gear
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP of the subscanning center roller.

[Countermeasure]
Replace the subscanning motor (MZ1).
“MC 9.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1)”

[Countermeasure]
Replace the spur gear of the subscanning * Nonuniformity is observed at 5 mm intervals in
center roller. the subscanning direction. The nonuniformity
“MC 9.7 Center Roller” cannot be visually recognized.
(A microscope is needed to check.)
FRRB203002.ai

* Nonuniformity is observed at 25 mm intervals


in the subscanning direction.
The nonuniformity can be visually recognized.

FRRB203001.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-39


MT-40

No.3 Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]


The cleaning brush is accidentally operated
<Example 1> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP when reading the image (areas A to E in the
left figure).
A

<Example 2> 14x14 inch (35x35 cm) IP


B

<Example 3> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP


[Countermeasure]
D The cleaning brush should not be operated
while reading the image.

<Example 4> 18x24 cm IP

E
FRRB203003.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-40


MT-41
BLANK PAGE

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-41


MT-42
BLANK PAGE

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-42


MT-43
BLANK PAGE

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-43


Control Sheet
Isuue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5870) All pages
09.23.2011 02 Revision (FM5937) 2-20, 27-119
03.15.2012 03 Revision (FM6003) 3, 31, 32, 46, 47, 51, 58, 59, 96, 99
12.01.2012 04 Revision (FM6113) 20, 44

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of


Parts (MC)

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


MC-1

1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for u INSTRUCTION u


The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Each Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.

1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment 1.2 Types of Screws
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal The DT screw and the TP screw employed in the machine are of similar shape and color.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume. Check the screw type referring to the figures below when attaching a screw.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
DT screw TP screw
following precautions should be observed.
Has four dots on the head Has no dot on the head
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.

WARNING/CAUTION
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".

u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit.
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.

u INSTRUCTION u
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
as needed.
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators.
erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the inside of a broken part.
installation location when the part or component removed
is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in the illustration
CHECK that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image
components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
When you install the covers after a check, replacement, or adjustment, make sure that the
"n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
high-voltage switch is ON. After the machine is restored to normal, run an image read check
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when
to verify that a read image is normal.
installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated
for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or
preventing erroneous assembly procedures.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-1


MC-2

2. Table of Contents 5.22


5.23
Cassette Set Base Assemblies
Side-Positioning Motor (MA3)
MC-57
MC-59
5.24 Solenoid (SOLA1) MC-60
3. Cover 3. Cover MC-3 5.25 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8) MC-61
3.1 Cover MC-3 5.26 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9) MC-62
3.2 Board Box Cover MC-4 5.27 Guide Plates, Stopper (Inch/metric) MC-63
3.3 Left-hand Side Plate MC-5 5.28 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly MC-64
3.4 Bottom Cover MC-6
6. Erasure Unit 6. Erasure Unit MC-66
3.5 Back-Top Plate MC-7
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate MC-8 6.1 Erasure Unit MC-66
3.7 Top Plate MC-9 6.2 Reflection Plate MC-67
3.8 PNL Board MC-10 6.3 Filter MC-68
6.4 INV Board MC-69
4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit MC-11 6.5 Lamp Assembly MC-70
4.1 Duct (Right) MC-11
7. Conveyor Unit 7. Conveyor Unit MC-71
4.2 Duct (Left) MC-11
7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side) MC-71
4.3 Power Supply Assembly MC-12
7.2 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) MC-72
4.4 PSU27A Power Supply MC-14
7.3 Rubber Rollers (A, B) MC-73
4.5 PSU27B Board MC-15
7.4 Rubber Roller (C, D) MC-75
4.6 CPU Board MC-16
7.5 Rubber Roller (E) MC-77
4.6.1 Replacement Procedures MC-16
7.6 Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-79
4.6.2 Machine Data Backup MC-16
7.7 Rubber Roller (F) MC-80
4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board MC-18
7.8 IP Sensor (SC3) MC-82
4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of
7.9 Antistatic Member MC-83
the RU and Console MC-21
4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version MC-22 8. Light-Collecting Unit 8. Light-Collecting Unit MC-84
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data MC-25 8.1 Light-Collecting Unit MC-84
4.6.7 Confirming the S Value MC-26 8.2 PMT Board MC-87
4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize MC-26 9. Scanning Optics Unit 9. Scanning Optics Unit MC-88
4.7 SND Board MC-27 9.1 Scanning Optics Unit MC-88
4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly MC-29
4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet MC-30 10. Subscanning Unit 10. Subscanning Unit MC-92
4.10 Fan (FAN1) MC-31 10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-92
10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-94
5. Cassette Set Unit 5. Cassette Set Unit MC-32 10.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1) MC-95
5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4) MC-32 10.4 Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly MC-96
5.2 Shutter MC-33 10.5 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and
5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket MC-34 Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly MC-97
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket MC-35 10.6 Subscanning Grip Assembly MC-99
5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly MC-36 10.7 Center Roller MC-102
5.6 Arm (White) (Reference Side) MC-38 10.8 Rubber Roller (G) MC-104
5.7 Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side) MC-39 10.9 Guide (A) MC-105
5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3) MC-40 10.10 Rubber Roller (H) MC-106
5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1) MC-41 10.11 Rubber Roller (I) MC-108
5.10 Guide (Large) MC-43 10.12 Guide (B) MC-109
5.11 IP Suction Arm MC-44 10.13 Rubber Roller (J) MC-110
5.12 Suction Cup MC-46 10.14 Scanner Cleaning Brush MC-112
5.13 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) MC-48
5.14 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) MC-49 11. Replacing the Fuses and 11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-114
5.15 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7) MC-50 Fuse Locations 11.1 Fuse Classification and
5.16 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear Replacement Procedures MC-114
(Reference Side) MC-51 11.2 CPU Board Fuses MC-115
5.17 IP Suction Pump (PA1) MC-52 11.3 SND Board Fuses MC-115
5.18 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1) MC-53 11.4 PSU27B Board Fuses MC-116
5.19 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), 12. List of Jigs and Tools 12. List of Jigs and Tools MC-117
IP Sensor Retaining Bracket MC-54 12.1 Jigs and Tools MC-117
5.20 Roller (Small) Assembly MC-55
5.21 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side) MC-56

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-2


MC-3

3. Cover

3.1 Cover

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the covers.
#1 Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
#2 Front-bottom cover
#3 Back cover
#4 Top cover
#5 Front-top cover
#6 Connector (PNL-A - PNL-B)
u NOTE u
Remove the covers in the following order.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover : #1
- Front-bottom cover : #1→#2
- Back cover : #1→#3
- Top cover : #1→#3→#4
- Front-top cover : #1→#2→#3→#4→#5→#6

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-3


MC-4
3.2 Board Box Cover

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover

(2) Remove the board box cover.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the board box cover.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the board box cover.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-4


MC-5
3.3 Left-hand Side Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. Rotate the handle, and put on the plate so that the joint of the plate engages with the joint of
the machine.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the left-hand side plate.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the left-hand side plate.

u NOTE u
Slightly push down the left-hand side plate while removing so that the left-hand side
plate does not get damaged by the top cover retaining bracket (A).

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-5


MC-6
3.4 Bottom Cover (3) Remove the bottom cover.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the bottom cover.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover

(2) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-6


MC-7
3.5 Back-Top Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. Be sure to mount the back-top plate on the half punches and retain with the screws straightly.
{MC:3.1_Cover} Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image abnormalities.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
(2) Remove the back-top plate.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the back-top plate.

u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the back-top plate as it is made from aluminum.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-7


MC-8
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
(2) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to drop
the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the table.

(5) Remove the following components.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to (6) Remove the back-bottom plate.
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the #1 Remove the screws.
table. #2 Remove the back-bottom plate.

(3) Remove the screws.

u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the back-bottom plate as it is made from aluminum.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-8


MC-9
n Reinstallation Procedures 3.7 Top Plate
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
- Be sure to mount the back-bottom plate on the half punches and retain with the screws (1) Remove the following components.
straightly. Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image
{MC:3.1_Cover}
abnormalities.
- When reinstalling the back-bottom plate, lift up the machine a little bit. By doing so, you can - Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
easily insert the back-bottom plate between the machine and the bottom cover. - Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
(2) Remove the top plate.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the top plate.

u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the top plate as it is made from aluminum.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the top plate on the half punches and retain with the screws straightly.
Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image abnormalities.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-9


MC-10
3.8 PNL Board (3) Remove the PNL board.
#1 Disconnect the connector.
#2 Remove the screws.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the PNL board.
(1) Remove the following components. #2
{MC:3.1_Cover} PS3x6 (x2)
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A - PNL-B) #3
(2) Remove the PNL board assembly.
#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#1
CN1
#2 Remove the screws.
#3 Remove the bracket.
#4 Remove the screws.
#4
PS3x6 (x2) PRIT03030011.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
#2
PS3x6 (x6) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#3

#1

PRIT03030010.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-10


MC-11

4. Housing Unit 4.2 Duct (Left)

n Removal Procedures
4.1 Duct (Right) (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
n Removal Procedures - Left-hand side cover
(1) Remove the following components.
(2) Remove the duct (Left).
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover REFERENCE
The duct (left) is attached to the housing by engaging with the hook.
(2) Remove the duct (Right).

REFERENCE
The duct (right) is attached to the housing by engaging with the hook.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-11


MC-12
4.3 Power Supply Assembly (3) Remove the Cable.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Unclamp the clamps.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screw.
When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)}
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.8_Main Power Switch Assembly}

(2) Remove the cable protector.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the cable protector.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-12


MC-13
(4) Remove the power supply assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screw. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the power supply assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
When reinstalling the power supply assembly, exercise care not to have the cable enclosed
by the following frame caught between the machine and the power supply assembly.

PRIT03040018.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-13


MC-14
4.4 PSU27A Power Supply (3) Remove the power supply.
#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screw.
When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground #4 Remove the power supply.
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)}
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)}
{MC:4.3_Power Supply Assembly}
(2) Remove the power supply assembly cover.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove power supply assembly cover.
#3 Disconnect the connectors.
#4 Unclamp the clamps.

#4
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#3
#2

#1
DT3x6 (x6) PRIT03040011.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-14


MC-15
4.5 PSU27B Board (3) Remove the board.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Remove the screw.
CAUTION #3 Remove the board.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)}
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)}
{MC:4.3_Power Supply Assembly}
(2) Remove the power supply assembly cover.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove power supply assembly cover.
#3 Disconnect the connectors.
#4 Unclamp the clamps. n Reinstallation Procedures
#4 Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#3
#2

#1
DT3x6 (x6) PRIT03040011.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-15


MC-16
4.6 CPU Board 4.6.2 Machine Data Backup

The FLASH ROM of the CPU board stores the RU machine data (configuration information, u NOTE u
scanner information and log information). Since the CPU board shipped as a service part When the CPU board is replaced, network settings on the RU all restore to the default
does not contain the machine data set, it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it was settings. However, since the Console keeps the settings before the replacement, it cannot
before the replacement by updating the software version and adjusting the machine data be connected if the network settings have been modified to site-specific values. Temporarily
after replacement. change the network settings for re-connection. You need take a note of the addresses for the
purpose.
For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures depending on
the RU conditions. (1) Turn ON the power of the Console.
- When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up machine
data after the replacement of the CPU board. (2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU.
- When the machine cannot boot up and the machine data cannot be backed up, restore
(3) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
the machine-specific data by means of the machinespecific data CD-ROM attached to
the machine. If no machine-specific data CD-ROM is available, adjust the machine data {MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction. (4) When an FD (floppy disk) is to be used for backing up the machine data, insert a
new FD into the Console. If another recording medium is to be used, connect it to
the Console.
4.6.1 Replacement Procedures
u NOTE u
Replace the CPU board according to the procedures mentioned in the following reference When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk of the
list. Console, the procedure (4) need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure (5).
Reference Part concerned
(5) Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST OF
{4.6.2} Machine Data Backup EXISTING RU”.
{4.6.3} Replacing the CPU Board Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME L EXISTING RU

{4.6.4} Setting the IP Address of the RU and Console RU IP ADDR

RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION


{4.6.5} Updating the RU Software Version BACKUP RESTORE
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
{4.6.6} Restoring the Machine Data ALL RUs SETTING

Confirming the S Value


RBMC07101.AI
{4.6.7}
{4.6.8} S Value Correction/LED Initialize

u NOTE u
When the IP address of the RU of “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console of
“172.16.1.20” (initial value) are employed, the procedure (7) in “4.6.2 Machine Data Backup”
and the procedures of “4.6.4 Setting the IP addresses of the RU and the Console” need not
be taken.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-16


MC-17
(6) Back up the "CONFIGURATION", "SCN OPTICAL DATA", "HISTORY LOG". (8) Write down the Internet settings of the Console.
Con gu a ion(C)

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
BACKUP #1 Click on [Network and Sharing Center] on the control panel.
CONFIGURATION
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU

#2 Click on [View status].


RU IP ADDR

EXECUTE #2
→The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears.
KUP ESTORE

#1
#3 Click on [Properties].
ALL RUs SETTING

→The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears.


BACKUP #4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click on [Properties].
#3 SCN ALL DATA
#5 Take a note of the addresses of “IP address”, “Subnet mask” and “Default Gateway”.
EXECUTE #4
(9) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.

(10) Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable from the RU.
BACKUP
#5 HISTORY LOG
(11) Eject the FD from the Console when the machine data has been backed up on the
FD.
EXECUTE #6
(12) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
RBMC04101.AI

(7) Open the MUTL network address and take a note of the IP address. {MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}
Con igu at on( )

RU IP Address
EACH RU SETTING

#1
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME L ST OF EXISTING RU

RU IP DDR
172.16.1.10

BAC P RESTORE

RU Subnet mask
ALL RUs S ING
255.255.0.0 #2

RU PC TOOL / MUTL

RU Default GateWay
172.16.1.0 #3

FTP IP Address
172.16.1.20 #4

RU Securety IP Address
0.0.0.0 #5

RU Securety Net Address


0.0.0.0 #6
RBMC04120 AI

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-17


MC-18
4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board (3) Remove the cable junction bracket.
#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screws.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #4 Remove the cable junction bracket.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
#2
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
CN2 #4

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
- Board box cover

(2) Remove the cable protector.


#1 Remove the screws. #1 #3
#2 Remove the cable protector. DT3x6 (x4)
PRIT03040001.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-18


MC-19
(4) Remove the CPU board.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Remove the screws.
#3 Remove the CPU board.
u INSTRUCTION u
When disconnecting the connector (CN13), hold the position as indicated in the figure
and disconnect it straight. Otherwise, the cable might get damaged.

u NOTE u
The CPU board is equipped with the LAN port. When removing the CPU board, remove
the LAN port by drawing it out from the frame bracket.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-19


MC-20
n Reinstallation Procedures l Meaning of DIP switch settings
(1) Make the DIP switch (S7) settings of a new CPU board to be installed. Normal
No. Item Meaning
setting
u INSTRUCTION u
1 For design OFF Set to OFF in the machine.
- The DIP switch (S6) is mounted as a spare. Do not change its setting.
- Make the DIP switch settings of a new CPU board to be installed equal to those of the 2 Machine selection OFF or Check the serial No. of the machine and set the
removed CPU board. If differently set, the machine will not work normally. ON DIP switch.
- Since the DIP switch setting is different depending on the serial No. of the machine, - #10001 to #59999
check the serial No. of the machine and set the DIP switch. No. 2 : ON
3 No. 3 : ON
No. 4 : OFF
l #10001 to #59999
- #60001 or later
4 No 2. : ON
No 3. : OFF
No 4. : OFF
5 Standard type/high OFF or Sets the type of the machine.
capacity type selection ON Set to OFF for the standard type, and to ON for
the high capacity type.
6 15x30 IP usable/nonusable ON or Set to ON in a machine with an IP of 15x30 size
OFF applicable, and to OFF in a machine with an IP of
15x30 size not applicable.
7 Restoring applications OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PC-
(for troubleshooting) TOOL with the IP address of the RU fixed to
“172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console
l #60001 or later When the IP addresses of fixed to “172.16.1.20” .
the RU and the FTP server OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
are unknown. ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed.
8 Not used OFF Not used

REFERENCE
Refer to the following for details of “CPU Board Setting Display”.
{MU:4.3 [3-1]_CPU Board Setting Display}

(2) Reinstall the board.


Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(3) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-20


MC-21
4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console (6) Open the network address of MUTL and make settings of the site-specific values
noted in the procedure (7) of “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”.
(1) Set the Internet settings of the Console. Con igu at on( )

RU IP Address
EACH RU SETTING

#1
CONNECTION TEST

#1 Click on [Network and Sharing Center] on the control panel.


RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU

RU IP ADDR
172.16.1.10

#2 Click on [View status]. BAC P RESTORE

RU Subnet mask
→The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears. ALL RUs S ING
255.255.0.0 #2
#3 Click on [Properties]. RU PC TOOL / MUTL

RU Default GateWay
→The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears. 172.16.1.0 #3
#4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click on [Properties].
FTP IP Address
#5 Set the “IP address” and the “Subnet mask” in [Use the following IP address] to the #4
172.16.1.20
following default values.
IP address: 172.16.1.20 RU Securety IP Address
0.0.0.0 #5
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. RU Securety Net Address
0.0.0.0 #6
(3) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
Update
(4) Select the RU whose address is to be changed from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”,
and input “172”, “16”, “1” and “10” in “RU IP ADDR”.
#7
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RBMC04121.AI

RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION (7) Set the Internet settings of the Console to the site-specific settings noted in the
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x procedure (8) in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”.

Con igu at on( )


(8) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
EACH RU SETT NG

{MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME IS OF EX STING RU

RU IP ADDR

BACKUP RESTORE

ALL RUs SETTING


#2
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 RBMC04122.AI

(5) Confirm the PING results, and click on to exit from the window.
{MU:1.8_PING}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-21


MC-22
4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].

The RU software version is updated to update the RU software in the latest conditions. After #1
the updating, set the master CL.

(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the Console.
#2
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
(2) Click on [START].
FRRB401007.ai

l [GOOD indication]
"value = 0 = 0x0" should be displayed.

l [NO GOOD indication]


Another message is displayed.
(5) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
RBMC04105.AI

(3) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF #2
EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP].
#1
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x

Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME L S OF EXISTING RU FRRB401008.ai
RU IP DDR

#2
l [GOOD indication]
"Transfer complete" should be displayed.
BACKUP RESTORE

l [NO GOOD indication]


ALL RUs SETTING

RBMC04106.AI
Another message is displayed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-22


MC-23
(6) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF (10) Check the precautions for the installation.
EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP].

LIST OF EXISTING RU
CAUTION
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION Never turn OFF the power of the RU nor the Console during the write into the FLASH
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot restart.

Con igu at on( )


(11) Verify that the FLASH ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME OF EXIST NG RU key.
RU IP ADDR

#2 #1
BACKUP RESTORE

ALL RUs SETTING

RBMC04109.AI

(7) Click on [OK].

RBMC04110.AI

(8) Verify the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].

RU VERSION
#1 x.x
#2
"Enter" RBMC04114.AI

#2 (12) Click on [OK].

RBMC04111.AI

(9) Click on [OK].


RBMC04115.AI

RBMC04112.AI

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-23


MC-24
(13) Verify the RU software version.

RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION


#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x

Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST

#2
RU NAME LIS OF EXIST NG RU

RU IP ADDR
l GOOD indication
BACKUP RESTORE
The text is displayed in black.

l NO GOOD indication
The text is displayed in red or the
ALL RUs SETTING

version number is not displayed.

RBMC04116.AI

u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure (1), and again perform the
installation.

(14) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.


{MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-24


MC-25
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data (1) Select the RU whose machine data is to be restored from the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”.
The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU board. Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING

Restore the backup data created in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”, and restore to the
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME OF EXISTING RU

RU IP ADDR

conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
u INSTRUCTION u
BACKUP RESTORE

- If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU board and you were ALL RUs SETTING

not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by means of the RBMC07101.AI

machine-specific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. (2) Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”.
- If no backup data or machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for the “format
RESTORE
adjustment” and “shading/sensitivity correction” to adjust the machine. Also perform “shading
Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST

CONFIGURATION
RU NAME LIST OF EXIST NG RU

speed correction” when needed.


RU IP ADDR

EXECUTE #2
l Format adjustment
BACKUP ORE

#1
{MU:4.3 [6-4]_Format Adjustment} ALL RUs SETTING

l Shading/sensitivity correction
{MU:4.3 [6-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
RESTORE
l Shading speed correction #3 SCN ALL DATA
{MU:4.3 [6-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction} EXECUTE #4

RESTORE
#5 HISTORY LOG

EXECUTE #6
RBMC04104.AI

(3) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.


(4) Turn ON the main power switch of the RU.
(5) Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.


l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}

l There is no error occurrence.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-25


MC-26
4.6.7 Confirming the S Value
(1) Confirm the S value.
{IN:13._Confirming the S Value}

4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize


(1) Correct the S value and initialize LED data.
{MU:4.3 [6-5-4]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
{MU:4.3 [6-8-3-1]_LED Initialize}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-26


MC-27
4.7 SND Board (3) Remove the cable junction bracket.
#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screws.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #4 Remove the cable junction bracket.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body #2
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. CN2 #4

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}

(2) Remove the cable protector.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the cable protector.
#1 #3
DT3x6 (x4)
PRIT03040001.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-27


MC-28
(4) Remove the SND board.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Remove the screws.
#3 Remove the board.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u INSTRUCTION u
When reinstalling the board, exercise care not to bring the fuse on the board into contact with
the brackets.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-28


MC-29
4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Left-hand side cover

(2) Remove the main power switch assembly.


#1 Disconnect the ground wires.
#2 Remove the screw.
#3 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals.
u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect while pressing the latch shaded in the figure below.

Latch

RBMC04018.AI

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-29


MC-30
4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet #2 Remove the main power switch.
#3 Remove the power supply inlet.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Left-hand side cover
{MC:4.8_Main Power Switch Assembly}

(2) Remove the main power switch and the power supply inlet.
#1 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals.
u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect while pressing the latch shaded in the figure below.

Latch
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
RBMC04018.AI
- Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet in the orientation as indicated in
the figure.
- Check that the main power switch is OFF.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-30


MC-31
4.10 Fan (FAN1) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. - Reinstall with the blowing direction of the fan directed as indicated by the arrow in the
figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)}

(2) Remove the fan (FAN1).


#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors.
#3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the fan (FAN1).

- After the reinstallation, turn ON the power and confirm the air-breathing into the equipment.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-31


MC-32

5. Cassette Set Unit n Reinstallation Procedures


Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)

(2) Remove the sensor (SA4).


#1 Disconnect the connector.
#2 Remove the screw.
#3 Remove the sensor.

#2
DT3x6

#1
#3
SA4

PRIT03050003.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-32


MC-33
5.2 Shutter n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. Check that the torsion coil spring is placed as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the
shutter.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}

(2) Remove the shutter.


#1 Press the shutter to the right and lift it.
#2 Remove the shutter.
#2 Torsion coil spring PRIT03050002.ai

#1

Torsion coil spring

PRIT03050001.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-33


MC-34
5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)

(2) Remove the cover retaining bracket.


#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#2 Remove the screw.
#3 Remove the Cover Retaining Bracket.

#1 #2
DT3x6 (x2)

#3

PRIT03050004.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-34


MC-35
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)

(2) Unclamp the clamp, and disconnect the connector.


#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#2
SA4

#1

PRIT03050005.ai

(3) Remove the cable junction bracket.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the cable junction bracket.

#2

#1
DT3x6 (x3)

PRIT03050006.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-35


MC-36
5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly (3) Remove the bracket.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the cable junction bracket.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #2
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} #1
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} DT3x6 (x2)
PRIT03050008.ai

(2) Unclamp the clamp, and disconnect the connector.


(4) Remove the spring, the housing, and the bearing.
#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#1 Remove the spring.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#2 Remove the housing.
#3 Remove the bearing.

#2
SA3

#1

PRIT03050007.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-36


MC-37
(5) Remove the spring, the housing, and the bearing. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the spring. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the housing.
#3 Remove the bearing.

(6) Remove the cassette cover closing roller assembly.


#1 Stir the cassette cover closing roller assembly.
#2 Remove the cassette cover closing roller assembly.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-37


MC-38
5.6 Arm (White) (Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}

(2) Remove the arm (white) (reference side).

#1

PRIT03050009.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-38


MC-39
5.7 Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}

(2) Remove the arm (white) (opposite reference side).

#1

PRIT03050010.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-39


MC-40
5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}

(2) Remove the IP suction arm HP sensor (SA3).


#1 Rotate the gear.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#3 Remove the screw.
#4 Remove the IP suction arm HP sensor (SA3).

#2
#1
SA3

#4

#3
DT3x6

PRIT03050011.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-40


MC-41
5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1) (3) Remove the gear.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) (3)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} PRIT03050013.ai

{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}


(4) Disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the screw to remove the gear.

u NOTE u
Since the screw retaining agent is applied to the following screw, the screw has strong
tightening force. Use a box screwdriver (support size 5mm: for M2.5) and an adjustable
end wrench to remove the screw.

#1 Remove the screw.


#2 Remove the gear.
(4)
MA1
PRIT03050014.ai

(5) Remove the screw to remove the IP suction arm driving motor assembly.
#2 #1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the IP suction arm driving motor assembly.
#1
BR3x6 (3B) #2

PRIT03050012.ai

#1
DT3x6 (4)
PRIT03050015.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-41


MC-42
(6) Remove the screw to remove the IP suction arm driving motor. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screw. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the IP suction arm driving motor.
u NOTE u
#2 - Reinstall the IP suction arm driving screw with the connector located in the orientation as
indicated in the figure.

Connector
#1
TP4x8 (x2)
PRIT03050016.ai

PRIT03050017.ai

- Apply the screw retaining agent when reinstalling the screw (BR3x6) to retain the gear in
the removal procedure step 2.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-42


MC-43
5.10 Guide (Large) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}

(2) Remove the screw to remove the IP suction arm driving motor.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the guide (large).

#2

#1
DT3x6 (x6)
PRIT03050018.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-43


MC-44
5.11 IP Suction Arm (3) Remove the guide on the opposite reference side.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the guide.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} (4) Remove the slide bearing and the bearing on the reference side.
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} #1 Remove the slide bearing.
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)} #2 Remove the bearing.
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}

(2) Remove the slide bearing and the bearing on the opposite reference side.
#1 Remove the slide bearing.
#2 Remove the bearing.

(5) Remove the guide on the reference side.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the guide.

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-44


MC-45
(6) Remove the hose. n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

(6)

PRIT03050019.ai

(7) Remove the IP suction arm.


#1 Stir the shaft of the IP suction arm on the reference side to the direction of the arrow.
#2 Disengage the shaft of the IP suction arm on the reference side from the groove on
the frame and lift it.
#3 Remove the IP suction arm.

#1

#3

#2

PRIT03050020.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-45


MC-46
5.12 Suction Cup (2) Remove the following components.

REFERENCE
n Removal Procedures Remove the suction cup by means of a Phillips screwdriver while pressing down the
hose joint with a wrench or the like.
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #1 Remove the screw.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #2 Remove the guide.
- Front-bottom cover #3 Remove the screws.
- Back cover #4 Remove the suction cup assembly.
- Top cover #5 Remove the E-ring.
- Front-top cover #6 Remove the suction cup.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) #7 Remove the joint.
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)} #8 Remove the packing.
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-46


MC-47
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
- Check that no foreign matter attaches to the sucking surface of the suction cup.
- Make sure that the KL ring is mounted in the right orientation as indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the suction cup assembly cannot be correctly mounted on the IP suction arm.

- Check that there is no excess of the hose in an area surrounded by the dotted line in the
figure. Otherwise, the hose might be pulled and get damaged when moving the IP suction
arm.

PRIT03050044.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-47


MC-48
5.13 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) (3) Disconnect the connector to remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1).

REFERENCE
n Removal Procedures Remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1) while holding the arm as indicated in the figure.

(1) Remove the following components.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover arm
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}

(2) Rotate the gear.


PRIT03050023.ai

#1 Disconnect the connector.


#2 Remove the screw.
(2) #3 Remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1) while holding the arm.

#2
(DT3x6)

#3
PRIT03050021.ai

#1
SA1 PRIT03050022.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-48


MC-49
5.14 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}

(2) Remove the cassette hold sensor (SA2).


#1 Rotate the gear.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#3 Remove the screw.
#4 Remove the cassette hold sensor (SA2).

#3
#4 DT3x6 (x2)

#2
SA2
#1

PRIT03050024.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-49


MC-50
5.15 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}

(2) Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA6, SA7).


#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors.
#3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA6, SA7).

#4
#3
DT3x6 (x2) #2
SA6
#2
SA7

#1 PRIT03050025.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-50


MC-51
5.16 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side) (3) Remove the straight pin.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover (3)
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)} PRIT03050027.ai

{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}


n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(2) Remove the side-positioning mechanism driving gear (reference side).
u NOTE u
Reinstall the black gear in the orientation as indicated in the figure.

#4

(2)

PRIT03050026.ai

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-51


MC-52
5.17 IP Suction Pump (PA1) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. - Put the IN hose connection between the hooks to reinstall the IP suction pump.
- Put the cable tie to align with the notches.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover

(2) Remove the IP suction pump (PA1).


#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#3 Remove the hose.
#4 Cut the cable tie.
#5 Remove the IP suction pump (PA1).

#1
#5
#2
PA1
#4
#3

PRIT03050028.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-52


MC-53
5.18 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover

(2) Remove the solenoid valve assembly (SVA1).


#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#2 Disconnect the connector.
#3 Remove the hose.
#4 Remove the screws.
#5 Remove the solenoid valve assembly (SVA1).

#5

#4 #3
BR3x6 (x2)

#2
#1
SVA1

PRIT03050030.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-53


MC-54
5.19 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), n Reinstallation Procedures
IP Sensor Retaining Bracket Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
The IP sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light receiving side in the
number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side has three pins.

(1) Remove the following components.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover

(2) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light emitting side), IP sensor retaining bracket.
#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors.
#3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the IP sensor retaining bracket.
#5 Remove the screw.
#6 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light emitting side).
#2
#4
PNL-B
#5 #3
TP3x6 DT3x6 (x2)
#6
#2
SA5 #1

PRIT03050031.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-54


MC-55
5.20 Roller (Small) Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)

(2) Remove the roller (small) assembly.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the roller (small) assembly.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-55


MC-56
5.21 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side) (3) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side).
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side).
n Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
The IP sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light receiving side in the
number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side has four pins.

(1) Remove the following components.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover n Reinstallation Procedures
- Top cover Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}

(2) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side) assembly.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side) assembly.
#3 Disconnect the connector.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-56


MC-57
5.22 Cassette Set Base Assemblies (2) Remove the connector.
#1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Remove the connector from the cassette set base assemblies.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly} (3) Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket) (4) Remove the screws on the reference side.
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-57


MC-58
(5) Remove the screws on the opposite reference side. u NOTE u
- When removing the cassette set base assemblies, it interfere with the screw holes.
Therefore, push the side panels apart, tilt the assemblies aside, and lift up the other side
repeatedly as indicated in the figure in order to avoid the interference with the screw holes.

(6) Remove the cassette set base assemblies.

- Do not push the side panels apart too hard.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-58


MC-59
5.23 Side-Positioning Motor (MA3) (2) Remove the motor.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the motor.
n Removal Procedures #3 Disconnect the connector.
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}
{MC:5.22_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-59


MC-60
5.24 Solenoid (SOLA1) (4) Remove the screws while holding the solenoid (SOLA1) by hand.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
(4)
(2) Unclamp the clamps to disconnect the connector. TP3x6 (x2) PRIT03050033.ai

#1 Unclamp the clamps. (5) Remove the solenoid (SOLA1).


#2 Disconnect the connector.

#2
SOL1

#1
(5)
PRIT03050032.ai

(3) Put the cable aside to the direction of the arrow. PRIT03050035.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
Check that the solenoid (SOLA1) and the bracket are reinstalled as indicated in the figure.

(3)

PRIT03050034.ai

bracket

PRIT03050036.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-60


MC-61
5.25 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8) (2) Remove the sensor.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the bracket.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the sensor.
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}
{MC:5.22_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-61


MC-62
5.26 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9) (2) Remove the sensor.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the bracket.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the sensor.
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A)) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}
{MC:5.22_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-62


MC-63
5.27 Guide Plates, Stopper (Inch/metric) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures REFERENCE


The guide plate, stopper (inch/metric) mounting position varies depending on the machine
(1) Remove the following components.
specifications. Refer to the following figures for reinstallation.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)

(2) Remove the guide plate, stopper (inch/metric).


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the guide plate.
#3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the stopper.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-63


MC-64
5.28 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly (2) Remove the screws on the reference side.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
(3) Remove the screws on the opposite reference side.
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)} (4) Remove the bracket.
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}
{MC:5.22_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-64


MC-65
(5) Remove the screws. (8) Remove the side-positioning guide assembly.

(6) Remove the screws.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

(7) Remove the E-ring.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-65


MC-66

6. Erasure Unit n Removal Procedures


(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
6.1 Erasure Unit - Right-hand side cover
(2) Remove the erasure unit.
CAUTION #1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors (INV-A, INV-B).
- When servicing the erasure unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
#3 Disconnect the connectors (INV-C, INV-D).
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.
- When you replace the erasure unit with the maintenance parts, confirm whether the
erasure lamps is the 2 lamps type or the 4 lamps type.

u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot.

REFERENCE
- The number of erasure lamps of the erasure unit is different depending on the machine
#4 Remove the screws.
type.
#5 Pull out the erasure unit.
Number of Number of
Type
Erasure Lamps INV Board
CR-IR 392 (Standard Type) 2 1
CR-IR 392 (High Capacity Type) 4 2

- Removal/Installation of the lamp assembly is common to all machine types.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-66


MC-67
6.2 Reflection Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. Check that the width around the center of the reflection plate is 6 ± 1 mm. If it is out of the
range, remove the reflection plate, and adjust the reflection plate.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
(2) Remove the reflection plate.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the reflection plate.
u NOTE u
- Do not strongly grasp the reflection plate and the filter, when removing the reflection
plate. Otherwise, the lamp located inside the filter might get damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection face of the reflection plate that has been removed. If it
gets damaged, IP erasure might not be performed normally.

n Adjust the Reflection Plate.


Push around the center of the reflection plate, and adjust a warp of the reflection plate.
Reinstall the reflection plate and make sure that the warp of the reflection plate is within an
appropriate range.

Reflection
plate

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-67


MC-68
6.3 Filter n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Exercise care not to smear the filter surface when removing/reinstalling the filter. - Place the filter in the orientation as indicated in the figure to reinstall the filter.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:6.2_Reflection Plate}
(2) Remove the filter.

#1 Remove the screw.


#2 Remove the bracket.
#3 Remove the filter from the half punch.
#4 Remove the filter.
u NOTE u
Do not bring the filter into contact with the lamp when removing the filter.
- Check that the pressure plate is placed at the position as indicated in the figure when
reinstalling the filter.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-68


MC-69
6.4 INV Board n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

REFERENCE
- The erasure unit with four erasure lamps is attached with two INV boards.
- The erasure unit with two erasure lamps is attached with one INV boards and there are
connectors have not being connected.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
(2) Rotate the erasure unit 180°.

(3) Remove the board.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the board.
#3 Remove the connector.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-69


MC-70
6.5 Lamp Assembly (3) Remove the lamp assembly.
#1 Remove the screws.
REFERENCE #2 Remove the lamp assembly.

- The number of erasure lamps of the erasure unit is different depending on the machine
type.
Type Number of Erasure
Lamps
CR-IR 392 (Standard Type) 2
CR-IR 392 (High Capacity Type) 4

- Removal/Installation of the lamp assembly is common to all machine types.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:6.2_Reflection Plate}
{MC:6.4_INV Board}

(2) Remove the cover.


#1 Remove the screws. n Reinstallation Procedures
#2 Remove the bracket. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#3 Put the cable aside.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u Exercise care not to have the connector and the cable of the lamp engaged with the bracket.
Exercise care not to have the connector and the cable of the lamp engaged with the The connector and the cable might get damaged.
bracket. The connector and the cable might get damaged.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-70


MC-71

7. Conveyor Unit n Reinstallation Procedures


Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side)

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}

(2) Remove the following components.


#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
#3 Remove the E-ring.
#4 Remove the spur gear.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-71


MC-72
7.2 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the following components. Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}

(2) Remove the following components.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the motor.
#3 Disconnect the connector.
connector PRIT03070007.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-72


MC-73
7.3 Rubber Rollers (A, B) (2) Move the IP suction arm forward by rotating the gear of the motor by hand.

n Roller Location

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover (3) Remove the following components.
- Back cover #1 Remove the E-ring.
- Top cover #2 Remove the spur gear.
- Front-top cover #3 Remove the spur gears.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) #4 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} #5 Remove the housings.
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} #6 Remove the bearings.
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-73


MC-74
(4) Remove the following components. (6) Remove the roller (B).
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#2 Remove the housings.
#3 Remove the bearings.

(5) Remove the roller (A).

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-74


MC-75
7.4 Rubber Roller (C, D) (2) Remove the following components.
#1 Remove the spur gears.
#2 Remove the tension coil spring.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the housings.
#4 Remove the bearings.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Front-bottom cover (3) Remove the following components.
- Back cover
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
- Top cover
#2 Remove the housings.
- Front-top cover
#3 Remove the bearings.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Roller (A, B)}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-75


MC-76
(4) Move the roller (C) forward. n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

(4)

PRIT03070016.ai

(5) Remove the roller (c).

u NOTE u
When removing the roller, exercise care not to bring the roller into contact with the
surroundings and damage it.

(5)

PRIT03070014.ai

(6) Remove the roller (D) as in step 5 and 6.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-76


MC-77
7.5 Rubber Roller (E) (2) Remove the following components.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the cable protector.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the tension coil spring.
#4 Remove the housing.
#5 Remove the bearing.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-77


MC-78
(3) Remove the following components. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the tension coil spring. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the housing.
#3 Remove the bearing.

(4) Remove the roller (E).

(4)

PRIT03070018.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-78


MC-79
7.6 Conveyor Guide Assembly (3) Remove the screws.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.5_Rubber Roller (E)}

(2) Unclamp the clamps.


(4) Remove the following components.
#1 Disconnect the connector.
#2 Remove the conveyor guide assembly.

#2

#1
SC3

PRIT03070021.ai
(2) PRIT03070019.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-79


MC-80
7.7 Rubber Roller (F) (2) Remove the following components.
#1 Remove the housing.
#2 Remove the bearing.
n Roller Location

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover} (3) Remove the following components.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1 Remove the housing.
- Back cover #2 Remove the bearing.
- Top cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.5_Rubber Roller (E)}
{MC:7.6_Conveyor Guide Assembly}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-80


MC-81
(4) Remove the roller (F). n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-81


MC-82
7.8 IP Sensor (SC3) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.5_Rubber Roller (E)}
{MC:7.6_Conveyor Guide Assembly}

(2) Remove the following components.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the IP sensor (SC3).

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-82


MC-83
7.9 Antistatic Member (2) Remove the antistatic members.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the antistatic member.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the screws.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the bracket.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #5 Remove the screws.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #6 Remove the antistatic member.
- Front-bottom cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White) (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White) (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.14_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.15_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:5.16_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:7.3_Rubber Rollers (A, B)}
{MC:7.4_Rubber Rollers (C, D)}
{MC:5.10_Guide (Large)}
{MC:5.11_IP Suction Arm}
{MC:5.19_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)
{MC:5.20_Roller (Small) Assembly}
{MC:5.21_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}
{MC:5.22_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
{MC:5.28_Side-Positioning Guide Assembly}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-83


MC-84

8. Light-Collecting Unit (2) Disconnect the connectors.


#1 Disconnect the connectors.
u INSTRUCTION u
8.1 Light-Collecting Unit Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in
the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged.

CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are
wearing gloves.

u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover
- Left-hand side cover (3) Remove the screws.
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover}
u NOTE u
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
Exercise care not to damage the acrylic part of the light-collecting unit with a screwdriver
when removing the screws.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-84


MC-85
(4) Remove the light-collecting unit. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, raise the light-collecting unit, and (1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
disengage from the hooks of the subscanning unit.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Draw out the light-collecting unit with its upper part tilted forward, and remove.
u NOTE u
u INSTRUCTION u
- Insert the light-collecting unit along the guide of the subscanning unit.
Be sure to check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is disengaged from the
hooks of the subscanning unit before removing the light-collecting unit. Otherwise, the
tip of the light-collecting unit might get damaged.

- Check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is correctly engaged with the hooks of
the subscanning unit.
#3 Place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure. If
reversely placed, load is applied to the adhesive part of the photomultiplier, causing the
light-collecting unit to be damaged.

- Make sure that the connector (CN2) is correctly connected. Otherwise, an image with a
transparent portion will result.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-85


MC-86
(2) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the light- n Check/Adjustment Procedures
collecting unit, and carry out “Initialize the LED data” of the MUTL, when the light-
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
collecting unit is replaced with a new one.
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
u INSTRUCTION u
(2) Restore the machine-specific data
When the light-collecting unit has been replaced with a new one, restore the attached
machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”. {MU:1.17_RESTORE}
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures} (3) Initialize the LED data.
{MU:4.3 [6-8-3-1]_LED Initialize}
(4) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

(5) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

(6) Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.


l No abnormal S-value is exhibited and image read normally takes place.
{IN:13._Confirming the S Value}

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without


nonuniformity.
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}

l There is no error occurrence.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-86


MC-87
8.2 PMT Board n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the board.

CAUTION Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to (2) When the board is replaced with a new one, recover the machine, and then
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body confirm the S-value.
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
(3) If the PMT board is replaced with a new one, perform the "SCN ALL DATA" backup
n Removal Procedures procedures.
(1) Remove the following components. {MU:1.16_BACKUP}
{MC:3.1_Cover} (4) Check the following points.
- Right-hand side cover
- Left-hand side cover l The RU normally enters the READY state.
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover}
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
nonuniformity.
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}
(2) Remove the board assmbly.
l There is no error occurrence.
Slowly remove the board assembly.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-87


MC-88

9. Scanning Optics Unit u NOTE u


Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the label
indicating how to place the scanning optics unit.
9.1 Scanning Optics Unit

CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

CAUTION u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
Never touch the window of the scanning optics unit. If fingerprints or the like are left
on the window, the scanning optics unit must be replaced.
u NOTE u
If you are going to use the scanning optics unit that was used in another machine, install
it and then make a shading speed correction. After shading correction, back up the "SCN
OPTICAL DATA".
{MU:4.3 [6-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction}

Window of scanning optic unit

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-88


MC-89
n Removal Procedures (4) Remove the scanning optics unit.
(1) Remove the following components. #1 Hold the green label and pull up the scanning optics unit.
#2 Draw out the scanning optics unit forward in parallel, and remove it.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
u NOTE u
- Right-hand side cover
- Left-hand side cover Raise the scanning optics unit to a position where the four holes on the unit do not
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover} interfere with the screw head, and pull out the unit.
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}
{MC:10.2_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}
(2) Disconnect the connectors.

Green label

Green label

(3) Loosen the screws.

(4) Place the scanning optics unit.


u INSTRUCTION u
Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the scanning optics unit.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-89


MC-90
n Reinstallation Procedures (2) Make sure that the cable is routed as shown in the figure below, after the light-
collecting unit is installed.
(1) Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(3) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the scanning
u INSTRUCTION u optics unit, after the machine is restored exactly as it was.
- When the scanning optics unit is to be replaced, install the unit after peeling a dust tight
u INSTRUCTION u
tape applied to the window of the scanning optics unit.
- Check that the scanning optics unit is correctly put on the retaining screw. When the scanning optics unit has been replaced with a new one, always restore the
attached machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:9.1_Scanning Optics Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

- Tighten the retaining screw while pressing the scanning optics unit against the
positioning pin.

Scanning Optics Unit

Positioning pin

Positioning pin

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-90


MC-91
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Restore the machine-specific data.
{MU:1.17_RESTORE}
(3) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

(4) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

(5) Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.


l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}

l There is no error occurrence.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-91


MC-92

10. Subscanning Unit (3) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.

10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover}

(2) Remove the screws.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-92


MC-93
n Reinstallation Procedures (3) Reinstall the screws.
(1) Place the post-reading conveyor guide assembly on the guide of the subscanning
unit.

(2) Insert the edge of the sheet in between the brackets.

(4) Mount the upper side of the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
#1 Locate the upper part on the half punch.
#2 Reinstall the screws.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-93


MC-94
10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) (3) Remove the sensor.
#1 Loosen the screw.
#2 Remove the bracket.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the screws.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}

(2) Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
Place the sensor in the orientation as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the sensor.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-94


MC-95
10.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1) n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u


(1) Remove the components in the following order. Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}

(2) Remove the motor.


#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
#3 Disconnect the connector.
#4 Remove the screws.
#5 Remove the motor.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-95


MC-96
10.4 Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

n Removal Procedures u INSTRUCTION u


(1) Remove the components in the following order. The spur gear of the cleaning guide driving assembly must be installed without any gap
between the protrusions of the bracket.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover Spur gear Protrusion
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}

(2) Remove the following components.


#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the cam.
#3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the bracket.
#5 Remove the spur gear.
u NOTE u
After reinstalling the Left-hand Side Plate, confirm that the cleaning guide does not spin
around.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-96


MC-97
10.5 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}

(2) Disconnect the connectors.


CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.

(5) Remove the bottom cover.


{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}

(6) Remove the bracket.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the bracket.
(3) Reinstall the back cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
u NOTE u
When you put the back side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the back cover.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-97


MC-98
(7) Remove the motor assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screws. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the motor assembly.
u NOTE u
- Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.

Connector

- When reinstalling the motor assembly, tighten the screw while pressing the bracket against
the shaft.

(8) Remove the motor and sensor.


Shaft
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the motor.
#3 Remove the sensor.
Bracket

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-98


MC-99
10.6 Subscanning Grip Assembly (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board} CAUTION
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate} When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to drop
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate} the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the table.
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)} (5) Unclamp the clamps.
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
(2) Remove the screws.

(5)
PRIT03100032.ai

(6) Remove the bracket.


#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the bracket.

u NOTE u
When removing the screws, nudge down the back cover a little bit.

(3) Reinstall the bottom cover.


{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}

u NOTE u
When you put the bottom side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the bottom cover.

020-233-03E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-99


MC-100
(7) Remove the subscanning grip assembly. #5 Remove the subscanning grip assembly.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the E-ring.
#3 Slide the bearing.

#4 Move the bracket, and remove the pin of the subscanning grip assembly from the
guide hole.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-100


MC-101
n Reinstallation Procedures - Make sure that the flange of the subscanning grip assembly is correctly fitted into the cam
groove. Otherwise, abnormalities in images will result.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
Flange Flange

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
- Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly by inserting its pin into the guide hole.

Groove Groove

GOOD NO GOOD RBMC09111.AI

- Put the spring between the cams. If the spring is disengaged, rotate the shaft and put the
spring between the cams.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-101


MC-102
10.7 Center Roller (2) Remove the bearing.
#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the bracket.
#5 Remove the bearing.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
(3) Remove the center roller.
- Back cover
- Top cover #1 Remove the center roller.
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} #2 Remove the bearing.
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
#2
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
#1
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
PRIT03100040.ai

REFERENCE
You do not need to remove the bracket of the reference side.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-102


MC-103
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
REFERENCE
Place the center roller with the shaft end having the E-ring groove facing the opposite
reference side.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-103


MC-104
10.8 Rubber Roller (G) (2) Remove the hook (reference side).
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#2 Remove the hook.
n Roller Location
#1
#2

PRIT03100041.ai

n Removal Procedures (3) Remove the hook (opposite reference side).


(1) Remove the components in the following order. #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #2 Remove the hook.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1
- Back cover
- Top cover #2
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly} PRIT03100042.ai

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-104


MC-105
(4) Remove the rubber roller (G). 10.9 Guide (A)
#1 Remove the E-rings.
#2 Remove the bearings.
#3 Remove the guides (white). n Removal Procedures
#4 Remove the rubber roller (G). (1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
n Reinstallation Procedures {MC:10.8_Rubber Roller (G)}
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. (2) Remove the guide (A).
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the guide (A).

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-105


MC-106
10.10 Rubber Roller (H) (2) Remove the bearing.
#1 Remove the screw.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the bracket.
#5 Remove the bearing.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
(3) Remove the rubber roller (H).
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} (3)
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
PRIT03100046.ai

{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
{MC:10.8_Rubber Roller (G)}
{MC:10.9_Guide (A)}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-106


MC-107
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
REFERENCE
The roller (H) makes the perforated shaft end towards the opposite reference side.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-107


MC-108
10.11 Rubber Roller (I) (3) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

n Roller Location

CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
n Removal Procedures table.

(1) Remove the components in the following order.


(4) Remove the bottom cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover (5) Remove the hook (reference side).
- Top cover
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} #2 Remove the hook.
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board} #1
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate} #2
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}

(2) Reinstall the back cover.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
u NOTE u PRIT03100047.ai

When you put the back side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the back cover.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-108


MC-109
(6) Remove the hook (opposite reference side). 10.12 Guide (B)
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#2 Remove the hook.
n Removal Procedures
#1 (1) Remove the components in the following order.
#2
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
PRIT03100048.ai

{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}


(7) Remove the rubber roller (I). {MC:10.11_Rubber Roller (I)}
#1 Remove the E-rings.
#2 Remove the bearings. (2) Remove the guide (B).
#3 Remove the guides (white). #1 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the rubber roller (I). #2 Remove the guide (B).

#2 #2

#3
#1 #3 #1
#4 E4
E4

PRIT03100049.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-109


MC-110
10.13 Rubber Roller (J) (2) Remove the bearing.
#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the screw.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the spur gears.
#4 Remove the screws.
#5 Remove the bracket.
#6 Remove the screw.
#7 Remove the bracket.
#8 Remove the bearing.

n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.3_IP Transport Motor (MZ1)}
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.6_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
{MC:10.11_Rubber Roller (I)}
{MC:10.12_Guide (B)}
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-110


MC-111
(3) Remove the rubber roller (J).

(3)

PRIT03100052.ai

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
REFERENCE
The roller (J) makes the perforated shaft end towards the opposite reference side.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-111


MC-112
10.14 Scanner Cleaning Brush (4) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
n Removal Procedures
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover} (5) Remove the components (reference side).
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
- Back cover #2 Remove the E-ring.
- Top cover #3 Remove the arm.
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} #4 Remove the bearing.
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.4_Cleaning Guide Driving Assembly}

(2) Reinstall the back cover.


{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
u NOTE u
When you put the back side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the back cover.

(3) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.

CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-112


MC-113
(6) Remove the components (opposite reference side). (7) Remove the scanner cleaning brush.
#1 Remove the E-ring. #1 Remove the scanner cleaning brush assembly.
#2 Remove the spur gear. #2 Remove the screws.
#3 Remove the E-ring. #3 Remove the scanner cleaning brush.
#4 Remove the spur gear.
#5 Remove the screw.
#6 Remove the spur gear.
#7 Remove the E-ring.
#8 Remove the spur gear.
#9 Remove the bearing.

n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u INSTRUCTION u
Reinstall the scanner cleaning brush assembly by putting its protrusion under the pin on the
frame.

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-113


MC-114

11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations n Fuse Replacement Procedures

CAUTIONS
11.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
n Fuse Classification - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated
l How to understand fuse notations amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. - To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.

(1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
Rated amperage of
1.6A
Fuse classification
symbol

[Remove]
Fuse
RBMC10005.AI

Pin

RBMC10004.AI

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-114


MC-115
11.2 CPU Board Fuses 11.3 SND Board Fuses

n Fuse Location n Fuse Location

n Fuse Information n Fuse Information


Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A) Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F7 LM 48 V 1A F8 LM 48 V 1A
F13 LM 48 V 1.6 A F9 LM 48 V 2A
F19 LM 48 V 1A F10 LM 48 V 2A
F20 LM 48 V 1.6 A

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-115


MC-116
11.4 PSU27B Board Fuses

n Fuse Location

n Fuse Information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F1 LM 48 V 1A
F2 LM 48 V 5A
F3 LM 48 V 3.2 A
F4 LM 48 V 1.6 A
F6 LM 48 V 5A
F7 LM 48 V 3.2 A
F8 ST 250 V 8A

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-116


MC-117

12. List of Jigs and Tools

12.1 Jigs and Tools


No applicable component

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-117


MC-118
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-118


MC-119
BLANK PAGE

020-233-02E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-119


Control Sheet
Isuue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.09.2011 01 New release (FM5498) All pages
12.01.2012 04 Revision (FM6113) 24, 83-85

CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Maintenance Utility (MU)

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual


MU-1

1. RU PC-TOOL 1.1.2 Tree Diagram


RU PC-TOOL
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer.
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the EACH RU SETTING
Console to RU, are performed on the Console connected to the RU via the network.
CONNECTION TEST
1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree {MU:1.4_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
{MU:1.11_INSTALL}
{MU:1.5_NEW}
1.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:1.12_VERSION UP}
{MU:1.6_DELETE}
RU PC-TOOL Ver.X.X {MU:1.13_EDIT HISTORY}
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
{MU:1.7_MUTL}
EACH RU SETTING {MU:1.14_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
CONNECTION TEST
{MU:1.8_PING}
RU NAME ru1 LIST OF EXISTING RU {MU:1.15_EDIT CL NAME}
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION NEW {MU:1.9_MON}
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru1 172.16.1.10 XXXXXX VX.X {MU:1.16_BACKUP}
{MU:1.10_FTP}
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE
{MU:1.17_RESTORE}
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION {MU:1.18_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
EDIT CL NAME
BACKUP RESTORE {MU:1.19_ERROR DB}
ERROR LOG

EXECUTE EXECUTE ALL RUs SETTEING


I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
{MU:1.20_UNINSTALL : ALL RUs}

ALL RUs SETTING {MU:1.21_VERSION UP : ALL RUs}


UNINSTALL VERSION UP

FRRB401001.ai
Configuration

{MU:1.22_CDPath}

Operation

{MU:1.23_Initialize APL}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-1


MU-2
1.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL 1.3 Maintenance Mode

n Starting RU PC-TOOL n RU Maintenance Display


(1) Press the [Window] key on the keyboard, and open the Start menu of Windows. “PC” flashes on the operation panel when the RU is under maintenance.
Some operations including cassette insertion are not allowed while “PC” flashes.
(2) Open the [Run...] window from the Start menu of Windows. Specify "C:/Program
Files/FujiFilm/FCR/TOOL/RuPcTool/RuPCTool.exe", and click on [OK].
n Canceling the RU Maintenance Display
n Exiting RU PC-TOOL You can cancel the maintenance display by pressing the [Stand-by switch] while pressing the
(1) Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of RU PC-TOOL. [Eraser button] on the operation panel.
Canceling the maintenance display, operation including the cassette insertion is allowed.
(2) Turn OFF the power of the RU.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-2


MU-3
1.4 LIST OF EXISTING RU 1.5 NEW

n Function n Function
Upon installing the RU software, a data folder corresponding to each machine is created in Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME"
the FTP server. The list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server are listed in “LIST and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew.
OF EXISTING RU”. Used to execute the following commands in the RU input in the “RU NAME” and “RU IP
Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETT NG
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION ADDR” fields if not displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” field.
ru1 172.16.1.10 XXXXXX VX.X
OF EXISTING RU

- MUTL - PING
RU NAME
RU IP ADDR

BACKUP RESTORE
- MON - INSTALL

ALL RUs SETTING


n Procedures
FRRB401003.ai
(1) Click on [NEW].
Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU
has not been installed normally. (2) Input the RU name and the IP address of the RU.
REFERENCES Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST

- For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE" field, uninstall it and then install the RU NAME L ST OF EXISTING RU

RU IP ADDR

RU software again.
- If "VERSION" is displayed in red, it indicates that the version of the RU software has not BACKUP RESTORE

been updated. Update the version as needed. ALL RUs SETTING

FRRB401004.ai

(3) Execute the respective commands.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-3


MU-4
1.6 DELETE 1.7 MUTL

n Function n Function
Used to delete a folder of the RU stored in the FTP server and also to delete it from "LIST OF Used to start the maintenance utility (MUTL) of the RU service utility.
EXISTING RU". MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of the
When reinstallation is required in such a case where the machine is to be used with the IP reading start position and reading width, as well as board checks.
address of the RU changed, use the “DELETE” command.
n Procedures
n Procedures {MU:4._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.

(2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".

(3) Click on [DELETE].


→ The confirmation window appears.

(4) Click on [OK].

(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST OF
EXISTING RU."

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-4


MU-5
1.8 PING

n Function
Used to execute the "PING" command for the RU.
When you click on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears where you can check
whether or not the network connection from the Console to the RU is normal.

n Procedures
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".

(2) Click on [PING].


→ The “command prompt” window appears.

(3) Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.

#2

#1

FRRB401005.ai

l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |

l [NO GOOD indication]


Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-5


MU-6
1.9 MON n Details of Items

(A) I/O name


n Function The I/O name is displayed.
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes Symbol Name
its status. No ON/OFF indication appears for the motor. SA01 Cassette IN sensor
(A) (B) (C) SA02 Cassette hold sensor
(D) SA03 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor
SA04 IP dropping sensor
SA06 Suction arm HP sensor
SA07 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
SA08 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor
SA09 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 Old/new cassette judgment sensor
SA11 Cassette ejection sensor
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor

FRRB401006.ai
SC03 IP sensor 1
SC09 "15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor
n Procedures SG01 IP sensor 2
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". SZ02 Grip release HP sensor

(2) Click on [MON]. * The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.

→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears. (B) Status


Displays one of statuses, OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ depending on the change of
(3) Click on [START].
the I/O conditions.
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
(C) Other information
has changed.
No display.
REFERENCES
(D) Status changed time
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However,
Displays the time when the I/O status changes.
the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to REFERENCE
resume the monitor function.
You can copy, cut, paste and delete the characters appearing on the monitor window.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-6


MU-7
1.10 FTP (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .

#2
n Function
Used to check the network for the RU selected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and to check #1
the operation of the FTP server for the Console.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the Console are normal.

n Procedures
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". FRRB401008.ai

(2) Click on [FTP]. l [GOOD indication]


→ Two windows appear. "Transfer complete" appears.

(3) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
l [NO GOOD indication]
Any other message appears.
#1

#2

FRRB401007.ai

l [GOOD indication]
“value=0=0x0” should be displayed.

l [NO GOOD indication]


Any other message appears.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-7


MU-8
1.11 INSTALL n Procedures
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.

CAUTION (2) Click on [NEW], and input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR” of the RU to be
Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power, the installed.
RU fails to start up because the contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted. {MU:1.5_NEW}

(3) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
u NOTE u
{MU:1.8_PING}
Restart the Console PC if “errCode=421” appears on the command prompt window during
installation. (4) Click on [INSTALL].

#1
n Function
Used to install the RU software into the RU entered in the "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR"
fields. Upon installation, an RU folder is created in the FTP server.
REFERENCE
The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the
settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU board of the RU to identify the type. FRRB401021.ai

→ The confirmation window appears.

(5) Click on [OK].

#1

FRRB401022.ai

→ The setting window for the installation conditions appears.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-8


MU-9
(6) Set the installation conditions, and click on [OK]. (10) Click on [OK].

#1 #1

FRRB401026.ai

#2 → The RU PC-TOOL window restores.


FRRB401023.ai

→ Installation starts. (11) Check that the RU you have installed is displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.

(7) Set “CONFIGURATION”, and click on [SET]. #1


{MU:1.14_EDIT CONFIGURATION}

(8) Set the master CL, and click on [SET].

FRRB401027.ai

#1 (12) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

(13) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

#2
FRRB401024.ai

→ The command prompt window appears, and the file is copied.

(9) Press the key according to the instruction on the window.

FRRB401025.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-9


MU-10
1.12 VERSION UP n Procedures
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.

CAUTION (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
Never turn OFF the RU power during version update. {MU:1.8_PING}
The contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
(3) Click on [VERSION UP].

n Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
REFERENCE
The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize #1
the device type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on
the CPU board of the RU to identify the device type.

FRRB401028.ai

→ The confirmation window appears.

(4) Click on [OK].

#1

FRRB401022.ai

→ The version selection window appears.

(5) Select the version, and click on [OK].

#1

#2
FRRB401029.ai

→ The confirmation window appears.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-10


MU-11
(6) Click on [OK]. (10) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

(11) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

#1
FRRB401030.ai

→ Version update starts.

(7) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.

FRRB401031.ai

(8) Click on [OK].

#1

FRRB401032.ai

→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.

(9) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has changed.

#1

FRRB401033.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-11


MU-12
1.13 EDIT HISTORY n Details of Items

l Details of USE
n Function No. Item Function
HISTORY information (including the number of IP’s processed by the RU, lighting time of
Displays the date when the RU software is installed. A
the erasure lamp, etc.) of the RU is displayed. Clear or edit the information when a unit has 1 INSTALLATION DATE
specific date can be entered manually.
been replaced or other occasions.
A total count of a period of time when the RU power is turned
TOTAL POWER ON
n Procedures 2 ON is displayed. A specific numerical value can be entered
TIME
manually.
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(2) Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. l Details of IP
→ The "EDIT HISTORY" window appears. No. Item Function

(3) Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. 1 RESET Resets each item.
Refer to the detailed description of each item for details of the contents appearing on the Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
screen. 2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
(4) Click on [SET].
TOTAL READING Counts the total count that normal reading takes place per IP
3
COUNTER size, and displays the total in “ALL IP SIZES”.
TOTAL PROCESSING Displays the total count that normal reading and erasure take
4
COUNTER ALL IP SIZES place. A specific numerical value can be entered manually.
PARTS PROCESSING Displays the number of times the part of interest is used.
5
COUNTER Specific numerical values can be entered manually.

l Details of LASER
No. Item Function

1 RESET Resets each item.


Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL TIME FOR THE Displays the total laser lighting time. A specific numerical
3
LASER ON value can be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total laser lighting count. A specific numerical
4
THE LASER ON value can be entered manually.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-12


MU-13
l Details of LAMP 1.14 EDIT CONFIGURATION
- THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING
No. Item Function
n Function
1 RESET Resets each item.
Used to edit the CONFIGURATION information for the RU.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed. The set information is written into the FLASH ROM of the RU.
2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually. CAUTION
TOTAL TIME FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting time. A specific The LED panel of the RU lights up while the FLASH ROM of the RU is being updated.
3 THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually. Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
LIGHTING If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting count. A specific
4 THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING n Procedures
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
- THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING
No. Item Function (2) Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION].

1 RESET Resets each item. →The "EDIT CONFIGURATION" window appears.

Displays the date when the RU software is installed. (3) Set the respective CONFIGURATION items.
2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
(4) Click on [SET].
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR A total of the lighting count of the lamp since the erasure lamp (5) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
3 THE ERASURE LAMP is replaced is displayed. A specific numerical value can be (6) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.
CLEANING entered manually.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-13


MU-14
n Details of Items No. Item Function
No. Item Function Determines whether the warning on the S value is to be only
Sets the identification code (1-digit alphanumeric character) with written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
EQUIPMENT CODE which the user identifies the RU which has read the image when in the error message.
1 9 WARNING OF S VALUE - LOG ONLY (default):
(A-Z) a plurality of RU’s are used. The identification code is printed on
Only write into the error log.
the output film.
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Sets the period of time since “primary erasure” is selected by the Write into the error log and display of the error message.
ERASE MODE TIME “erasure” button of the RU until “Image reading” is automatically
2 Determines whether or not the error is to be regularly displayed
OUT (0-999[s]) restored in the unit of second. When “0” is set, the mode is kept
on the display.
changed to “primary erasure”. The default is 20 seconds. 10 Regular error display
- ON (default): The error is regularly displayed.
Determines whether the alarm sounds when a cassette is set. - OFF: The error is not regularly displayed.
Confirmation Alarm
3 - ON (default): An alarm sounds.
when cassette is set Sets the timing when the erasure lamp cleaning message is
- OFF: No alarm sounds.
displayed.
Selects the kind of IP (inch or metric) to be used in the machine. - OFF (default):
- INCH (default): The message is not displayed.
4 IP Size Code Setting Select when inch IP’s are to be used. - 6000 or 365 days:
- METRIC:
The message is displayed when the total count of IP
Select when metric IP’s are to be used.
conveyance of 6000 is reached or 365 days elapses.
Selects the read speed mode of the IP. - 3000 or 182 days:
- None : Not used. CONDITION OF ERASE The message is displayed when the total count of IP
- FR : When the high-capacity type is installed, images 11
LAMP CLEANING conveyance of 3000 is reached or 182 days elapses.
Standard Read Speed on the 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) or 14" x 14" (35cm - 12000 or 730 days:
5
Setting x 35cm) size IPs are read in the high-capacity The message is displayed when the total count of IP
mode. conveyance of 12000 is reached or 730 days elapses.
- GR (default) : Images on any size of the IPs are read in the - OPTIONAL:
standard mode. The message is displayed when an optional total count of IP
Determines whether the warning on the laser life is to be only conveyance or an optional number of days is reached.
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed The count and the number of days are set by the commands of
in the error message. Nos. 11 and 12.
6 WARNING OF LD LIFE - LOG ONLY (default): CONDITION OF Sets the total count of IP conveyance when “OPTIONAL” is
Only write into the error log.
ERASE LAMP selected in the command No.10.
- LOG & MESSAGE: 12
CLEANING [COUNT] The default is 6000.
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
(OPTIONAL)
Determines whether the warning on the erasure lamp life is to
CONDITION OF Sets the number of days when “OPTIONAL” is selected in the
be only written into the error log or written into the error log and
ERASE LAMP command No.10.
displayed in the error message. 13
WARNING OF LAMP CLEANING [DAYS] The default is 365 days.
7 - LOG ONLY (default):
LIFE (OPTIONAL)
Only write into the error log.
- LOG & MESSAGE: Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when the [Eraser
Write into the error log and display of the error message. button] and the [Stand-by switch] are pressed.
14 Key Touch Sound
Determines whether the warning on the part life is to be only - ON (default): An alarm sounds.
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed - OFF: No alarm sounds.
in the error message. Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when an error
WARNING OF PARTS
8 - LOG ONLY (default): occurs.
LIFE 15 Alarm Sound
Only write into the error log. - ON (default): An alarm sounds.
- LOG & MESSAGE: - OFF: No alarm sounds.
Write into the error log and display of the error message.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-14


MU-15
No. Item Function 1.15 EDIT CL NAME
Determines whether or not the sleep mode is to be used.
16 Sleep Mode Change - ON: The sleep mode is used.
n Function
- OFF (default): The sleep mode is not used.
Sleep Mode Change Sets the time for transiting to the sleep mode. Used to edit/add the Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master
17 CL's.
Time ([min]) The default is 60 minutes.
Determines whether or not to enable to release errors using the
erasure mode switching button.
RELEASE ERROR - OFF (default) : Errors cannot be released using the erasure n Procedures for Editing/Adding the Console as Image Transfer Destination
18
(Mode Button) mode switching button. (1) Select from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" an RU where the Console as the image
- ON : Errors can be released using the erasure mode transfer destinations is to be edited or added, and click on [EDIT CL NAME].
switching button.
WAKE ON LAN PORT Sets the port No. to be used for Wake On LAN. → “CL NAME” window appears.
19
NO The default is 6001.
(2) To edit, select the Console to be edited, and then click on [MODIFY]; to add, click
on [NEW].
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.

(3) Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET].

(4) Click on [SET].


→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.

n Procedures for Setting the Master CL


(1) Select the CL to be set as the master CL from those appearing on the “CL NAME”
window.

(2) Click on [>>] button, and click on [SET].


→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-15


MU-16
1.16 BACKUP n Procedures
You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for
backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the Console are
n Function selectable.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information, error log data or the like from the FLASH
Select the item to be backed up with
Con igu at on( )

EACH RU SE ING
CONNEC ION ES

ROM of the RU to a recording medium such as an FD. You can back up the following data.
RU NAME IS O EXIS ING RU

the RU PC-TOOL, and then click on


RU I ADDR

l "ERROR LOG"
BACKU S ORE

"EXECUTE".
Log data is backed up. A RUs SE NG

l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is backed up. To change the backup location,
l "TRACE LOGS" click on .
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.

l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.

l "LOG ALL"
All of “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” are backed up at a time. Only the drives and directories
recognized by the Console are
l "SCN ALL DATA" displayed as the locations available
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are backed up at a time. for backup.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.

l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Choose a backup location (by double-clicking it).


Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.

The selected
location
appears.

FRRB401010.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-16


MU-17
1.17 RESTORE n Procedures
You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying the drive and
directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by
n Function the Console are selectable.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information and machine-specific data from a recording
Select the item to be restored
Con gu a on(C)

medium such as an FD to the FLASH ROM of the RU. The items to be restored include:
EACH RU SE NG
CONNEC ION ES
RU NAME S O EXIS NG RU

with the RU PC-TOOL, and then


RU I ADDR

l "CONFIGURATION" BACKU S ORE


click on "EXECUTE".
Configuration data is restored. A RUs SE ING

l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
Click on to change
l "SCN ALL DATA" the region to restore.
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are restored at a time.

l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"


Light collecting system data among the scanner data is restored.

l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"


Of the scanner data, optical data is restored. Only the drives and directries
REFERENCE
recognized by the Console are
displayed as regions to which
The contents copied in the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the main power the data can be restored.
switch of the RU and again turning it ON.

Select (double-click) the region to restore.

The selected
location
appears.

FRRB401011.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-17


MU-18
1.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function

The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
n Function displayed on the Timing Chart screen.

The I/O trace data is displayed in a timing chart. The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
2 "Pass" text box
You can check operations including the reading of cassettes, erasure, and conveyance check chart is entered.
in the RU PC-TOOL MUTL. The display scale for the time base (horizontal
Note that only the I/O trace data can be displayed. 3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
1 2 3 4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
5
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
- B: Time elapsed from power ON to the position

4 pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the [CLEAR] button is clicked, the values in the
A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.

n Procedures
(1) Back up the "LOG ALL".
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}

(2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".


A B A-B 6
FRRB401012.ai
(3) Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
→The "I/O TRACE EXPERT" window appears, and the latest trace data is displayed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-18


MU-19
1.19 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
n Function Of the error log files, only "FATAL" errors are
2 “FATAL" button
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of displayed.
the RU. Of the error log files, only "WARNING" errors are
3 “WARNING” button
1 2 3 4 5 6 displayed.

7 4 “BOTH” button
Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.

9 The latest error log data is copied from the CPU


6 “UPDATE” button
board of the RU to the FTP server of the Console.
11
The contents of the error log file selected are
displayed.
8 12 7 Error message list box Displays the name and occurrence conditions on the
bottom of the window, when selecting the displayed
data.
13
10 8 “Error Code” text box Displays the code of the selected error message.
9 “Error Name” text box Displays the name of the selected error message.
Displays the occurrence conditions of the selected
10 “Meaning” text box
error message.
Displays the detailed information of the selected error
14 15 11 “Details Info.” button
message.
FRRB401013.ai

Displays the analysis flow of the selected error


n Procedures 12 “Analysis Flow” button
message.
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". You can keep a note about the selected error
13 “Memo.” text box message.
(2) Click on [ERROR DB]. Up to seven memos may be entered.
→The “ERROR DB” window appears. The name of the person (author) who entered text in
14 “Author” text box
the “Memo.” text box is entered.
(3) Click on [UPDATE], and update the error log.
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key
and press the [SAVE] button again.

u NOTE u
*1: When the error log is to be completely cleared, do so after the main power switch of the
RU is turned OFF. If the log is cleared while the RU is working, the data carried in the RU
is again written into the FTP server when the RU power is subsequently turned OFF, and
the data cannot be cleared as a result.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-19


MU-20
1.20 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs n Procedures

CAUTION
n Function
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings)
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into
of the RU, Console, and FTP server.
the Console are collectively uninstalled. You need not use the command when a single
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost.
machine is connected.
- For the RU connected to the Console, back up the following files. Those files must
be restored after installation.
Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP server
- CONFIGURATION
and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". In addition, the contents of “C:/
- HISTORY LOG
ProgramFiles/FujiFilm/FCR” directory on the Console are deleted.
- SCN ALL DATA
u NOTE u
If a plurality of RU’s of the same device type exist, the software and configuration data for the (1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.
RU of the same type are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL. (2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed.
(3) Click on [UNINSTALL] on ALL RUs SETTING.
→ The confirmation window appears.

(4) Click on [OK].

(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST OF
EXISTING RU."

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-20


MU-21
1.21 VERSION UP: ALL RUs n Procedures
REFERENCE
n Function When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, update the connected RU’s one by one
in the sequence they are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". If two RU’s are registered
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into
in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in the sequence of ru2 and ru1, they are updated in this order.
the Console are collectively updated in version. You need not use the command when a
single machine is connected.
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
CAUTION (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
Never turn OFF the Console/RU power during the version updating. {MU:1.8_PING}
The contents of the FLASH ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot
up. (3) Repeat procedures (1) and (2) for all the RU's connected to the Console.
(4) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.
u NOTE u
When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, the RU software in the connected RU’s (5) Click on [VERSION UP] on ALL RUs SETTING.
is sequentially updated. Do not turn OFF the Console and RU power until the installation is (6) Click on [OK].
completed for all the RU's.
After the installation, be sure to check the software version of all of the RU's, and check to (7) Set the version update conditions, and click on [OK].
make sure that they have been updated in version.
→ The version update of the RU software starts.

(8) Click on [OK].


→ The version update starts.

(9) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.

(10) Click on [OK].


→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.

(11) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has changed.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-21


MU-22
1.22 CDPath (2) Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.

l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the


n Function procedure (5).
The RU software should normally be installed from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
If a folder that completely copies the RU-APL CD-ROM data resides in the hard disk of the
Console, you may install the RU software from that hard disk without using the RU-APL CD-
ROM by specifying the path of that folder.
u NOTE u FRRB401015.ai

- To copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data, its whole data should be completely copied to a single
folder. If it is partially copied, the installation cannot be executed. l To enter the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, installation from proceed to the next procedure.
the RU-APL CD-ROM cannot be executed.

n Procedures for Setting "CDPath"


The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the "Copy CD-R" of the C drive are
described as an example. FRRB401016.ai

(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The window for selecting the folder appears.

#1 (3) Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.


"Configuration(C)"

#2
"CDPath(D) Ctrl+D"

FRRB401014.ai

→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.

FRRB401017.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-22


MU-23
(4) Click on [OK]. n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.

(2) Click on [CLEAR].


→ The path in the text box is cleared.

(3) Click on [SET].


→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.

FRRB401018.ai

→ The path is displayed in the text box.

(5) Click on [SET].

FRRB401019.ai

→ “CDPath” is set.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-23


MU-24
1.23 Initialize APL (5) Start the RU PC-TOOL.

(6) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".


CAUTION (7) Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu.
Never turn OFF the Console/RU power during the initialization. The contents of the
FLASH ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. (8) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console and click on [OK].

(9) Verify that the RU's IP address, which was selected in the procedure (6), is
n Function displayed, and then click on [OK].
Effects RU application initialization. → Initialization starts.
u NOTE u (10) Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key.
Effect RU application initialization only when no error code appears and the machine does
not boot up during troubleshooting.

n Procedures
(1) Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.

(2) Change the DIP switch (S7) settings on the CPU board.
- When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are not known: FRRB401020.ai

#1 Set the DIP switch-No.3 to OFF. (11) Turn OFF the power of the RU.

#2 Change the IP address of the Console to 172.16.1.20. Write down the IP address if a (12) Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.
site-specific value is used.
(13) Restore the original setting for DIP switch on the CPU board.
#3 Set the DIP switch-No.7 to ON. {MC:4.6.3_Replacing the CPU Board_n Reinstallation Procedures}
REFERENCE (14) Restore the machine.
When the machine is started with the DIP switch (S7)-No.7 set to ON, the IP address of
the RU is set to the default (172.16.1.10) only when initialized. (15) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU.
The IP address of the Console need be changed to 172.16.x.x accordingly.
(16) Turn ON the power of the RU.
The RU starts under the following conditions:
- When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are known:
#1 Set the DIP switch-No.3 to OFF. - All LEDs light up.
- Initialization does not take place.
#2 Set the DIP switch-No.8 to ON.
(17) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(3) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU. (18) Delete the initialized RU.
(4) Turn ON the power of the RU. {MU:1.6_DELETE}
The RU starts under the following conditions: (19) Install the RU software.
- All LEDs light up. {MU:1.11_INSTALL}
- Initialization does not take place.

020-233-04E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-24


MU-25

2. Client PC l Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
Even when the Console is not running, it is possible to execute command by specifying the
RU's IP address. Executable commands are MUTL, PING, and MON.

2.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC Power OFF

The client PC is a notebook PC on which CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. When CLIENT PC-
TOOL is installed on a notebook PC from the RU-APL CD-ROM, the notebook PC can be Console
used as the client PC.

2.1.1 Features of the Client PC


The use of CLIENT PC-TOOL, which is installed on the client PC, makes it possible to Direct command execution
execute commands as needed for RU maintenance even while the Console is used. from the client PC
Note, however, the commands executable from RU PC-TOOL of the Console differ from
those executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
RU Client PC
Commands executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL can be classified into the following three
categories:
- Commands for editing data stored in the client PC FRRB402001.ai

- Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU


l Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the Console
- Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the Console
Commands can be executed for an RU that is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-
CAUTION TOOL, which is installed on the client PC. This command execution is performed via the
Console (FTP server).
When executing a command for allowing CLIENT PC-TOOL to access the RU's FLASH
Being used
ROM, it is necessary to observe precautions as is the case with the use of RU PC-
TOOL. Refer to the following for details on the precautions.
{MU:2.1.3_Precautions for Using the Client PC} Console

Commands for editing data stored in the client PC


l
Data stored in the client PC can be edited and saved even when the client PC is not
connected to the network in the user's site.

RU Client PC

FRRB402002.ai

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-25


MU-26
2.1.2 Operations of the Client PC

l Client PC operation immediately after installation l Client PC operation after hospital list creation
When you install and start CLIENT PC-TOOL, the following window opens. When an RU is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-TOOL, all commands of CLIENT
RU PC-TOOL Ver.X.X
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
PC-TOOL can be executed. However, executable commands vary depending on whether
the client PC is in the "ON-LINE mode" or "OFF-LINE mode".
IP ADDRESS VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY

MUTL PING MON FTP EDIT CONFIGURATION EDIT CL NAME


Hospital list
HOSPITAL I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB

READ (MEDIA->CLIENT PC)


RU C- OO Ve 5
Con igu at on(C) Ope a on(O)

IP ADDRESS 172 16 1 10 VERSION UP

MUTL P NG MON FTP

EXECUTE HOSPITAL
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 17
DB

READ (MEDIA->CL ENT PC)


ru0 ( 17 7)

WRITE (CLIENT PC->MEDIA)


ru1 ( 172. 6. . , CR IR356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR- R355 , 1.7 ) EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR- R356 , 1.7 )
WRITE (CLIENT PC->MEDIA)

EXECUTE
UPLORD (CLIENT PC->FTP SERVER->RU)

EXECUTE EXECUTE
DOWNLORD (RU >FTP SERVER >CL ENT PC)

UPLORD (CLIENT PC->FTP SERVER->RU) EXECUTE

EXECUTE
DOWNLORD (RU->FTP SERVER->CLIENT PC)
FRRB402004.ai

EXECUTE Refer to the following for the difference between the "ON-LINE mode" and "OFF-LINE mode"
FRRB402003.ai
and the details on commands executable in the respective modes.
The following commands can be executed immediately after installation: {MU:2.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- Commands selectable from the "Configuration (C)" menu
- Commands executable for a machine having an address that is entered in the IP address
field (MUTL, PING, and MON)

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-26


MU-27
2.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC 2.1.5 Precautions in Setting the Console
As is the case with RU PC-TOOL, CLIENT PC-TOOL has commands for accessing the RU's When the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be used in the ON-LINE mode, always check to make sure
FLASH ROM. When executing the commands for accessing the FLASH ROM, observe the that the “Windows Firewall” of the Console is set as follows.
following precautions: If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
- When executing a command for accessing the RU's FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the RU
or client PC power. If you turn OFF the power, the contents of the FLASH ROM become l Setting of the “Exceptions” tab of the Windows firewall
damaged so that the RU does not start up. The following two items must be checked in their boxes.
- While the Console and RU are used, do not execute a command that allows the client PC - FTP server
to access the FLASH ROM. - inetinfo

Refer to the following for the detailed procedures of checking the respective settings.
{MU:2.10_Checking the Console Setup when Using the Client PC}
2.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM
Drive
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL, creating the hospital list,
and executing the version update command.
Before using a PC without a CD-ROM as the client PC, it is necessary to copy the contents
of the RU-APL CD-ROM to a certain place within the client PC.
When the CD path is set up after CLIENT PC-TOOL installation, it is possible to create the
hospital list and execute the version update command even when the RU-APL CD-ROM is
not on hand.

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-27


MU-28
2.2 Setting Up the Client PC 2.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM

This section describes the procedure for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on the notebook PC (1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the notebook PC.
with the RU-APL CD-ROM so that the notebook PC can be used as the client PC. → The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.

n Items Required for Preparing the Client PC (2) Click on [INSTALL].


- Notebook PC for use as the client PC
(3) Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
- RU-APL CD-ROM
u NOTE u
n Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
Use either of the following two CLIENT PC-TOOL installation procedures: normally installed. If you accidentally select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], again
l Installing from the RU-APL CD-ROM take the procedures below for reinstallation.
Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically {MU:2.8_Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
opens. Start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL by clicking "INSTALL" in the "Set Up PC-TOOL"
window.
(4) Click on [NEXT].
Refer to the following for details on the installation procedure.
{MU:2.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM} (5) Click on [Install].

(6) Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.


l Installing on a PC without a CD-ROM drive
Install CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
flash memory or other recording medium.
Refer to the following for details on the installation procedure. 2.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive
{MU:2.2.2_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive}
(1) With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash
memory or other recording medium.

u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM.

(2) Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC.

(3) Copy all the data in the RU-APL CD-ROM copied in the procedure (1) into the
folder created in the procedure (2).

(4) Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.

(5) Take the procedures from (2) to (6) in the following section, and install the CLIENT
PC-TOOL.
{MU:2.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-28


MU-29
2.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL
This section describes the procedures for starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Two different procedures are used to start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.

l Starting from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)


Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start CLIENT PC-TOOL from the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
Refer to the following for details on the procedure.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}

l Starting from a client PC window


From a client PC window, start CLIENT PC-TOOL by specifying its file name.
Refer to the following for details on the procedure.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-29


MU-30
2.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification (5) Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.
Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site and make the network settings of
the client PC. (6) Double-click "Local Area Connection," display the “Local Area Connection
Status” window, and click on [Property].
Network connection
→ The “Local Area Connection Property” window appears.

(7) Choose "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click on [Properties].

(8) Set the client PC IP address and then click on [OK].


RU Console
u NOTE u
Connect - Ask the network manager of the user’s site to check the available IP address before
HUB changing the IP address. If the IP address of another device is specified, the client PC
cannot be connected with the network.
FRRB402008.ai
- Set the subnet mask and the default gateway as the need arises, after the network
setups of the site are confirmed.
(1) Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site.
(9) Close the "Local Area Connection Properties" window, "Local Area Connection
(2) Make sure that the proxy server setting in “Internet Options” of the client PC is
“OFF”. Status" window, and "Network Connection" window.

{MU:2.11_Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC} (10) Enter the address of the RU or Console connected to the network in the user's
site, and then execute the "PING" command to verify that the client PC is
(3) Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
connected to the network in the user's site.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
{MU:1.8_PING}
(4) Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:3.27_OnLine}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-30


MU-31
2.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List 2.5.1 RU Registration

Create the hospital list in “CLIENT PC-TOOL”. The hospital list includes names of sites, FTP Refer to the following for the procedures of registering, deleting and copying the RU in the
servers used at the site, and the RU’s registered in a tree format. Upon registering a site, hospital list.
FTP server and RU in the hospital list, their folders are created in the C drive of the client PC. {MU:3.5_NEW RU}
With “CLIENT PC-TOOL”, the maintenance can be performed only for the RU registered in {MU:3.7_COPY}
the hospital list. {MU:3.6_DELETE}
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL

RU1 RU2 FTP1 RU3

172.016.001.021

RU4 FTP1

172.016.001.022

Register, in the hospital list,


the RU's subject to the maintenance.
Hospital list

RU C- OO Ve 5
Con igu at on(C) Ope a ion O)

IP ADDRESS 172 16 1 10 VERS O

MUTL P NG MON FTP

HOSPITAL ERROR DB
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. :
READ (MEDIA->CLIENT PC)
ru0 ( 172 355 , .7 )
ru1 ( 172. , CR- R356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 ) EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
WRITE (CLIENT PC->MEDIA)

EXECUTE
UPLORD (CLIENT PC->FTP SERVER->RU)

EXECUTE
DOWNLORD (RU->FTP SERVER >CLIENT PC)

EXECUTE

FRRB402009.ai

u NOTE u
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for preparing/editing the hospital list. Therefore, have the
RU-APL CD-ROM on hand before you start performing the procedure.
If you create or edit the hospital list with a PC without a CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to
copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a certain location within the client PC and set the CD-
path. Refer to the following for the procedures of setting the CD-Path.
{MU:3.24_CDPath}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-31


MU-32
2.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE l OFF-LINE mode

2.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations


By setting the IP address of the client PC, the PC can be connected with the network in the "OnLine" is unchecked.
user’s site. The client PC has commands to be executed while connected with the network
of the site (ON-LINE mode) and commands to be executed while separated from the network
of the site (OFF-LINE mode). The available commands differ depending on the mode of the FRRB402012.ai

client PC, so that it is necessary to change over the mode of the client PC depending on the The following commands are available when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
type of the maintenance. The client PC can be changed over between the ON-LINE and - Commands to register the RU where the maintenance will take place
OFF-LINE modes through the use of the “OnLine” command of CLIENT PC-TOOL. - Commands to edit the machine information of the RU acquired during the ON-LINE mode
{MU:3.27_OnLine} Client PC
Data in the client PC is
l ON-LINE mode edited.
OFF-LINE

"OnLine" is checked.
RU FTP
FRRB402013.ai

Refer to the following for details on operations in the OFF-LINE mode.


FRRB402010.ai
{MU:2.6.3_Operation in OFF-LINE Mode}
When the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode, the following commands are available.
- Commands to acquire/write machine information of the RU
- Commands to access the FLASH ROM of the RU and the FTP server
- Command to directly operate the RU (MUTL)
When a command to access the FLASH ROM of the RU is executed, “PC” flashes on the
operation panel of the RU as in the case of the RU PC-TOOL of the Console.

A command is executed
for the RU and the FTP.
Client PC

ON-LINE

RU FTP
FRRB402011.ai

Refer to the following for details on operations in the ON-LINE mode.


{MU:2.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode}

020-233-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-32


MU-33
2.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the ON-LINE mode.

Command Function Reference


REFERENCE
Acquires the software version of the
The “ON-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when only the commands to
GET VERSION RU stored in the FTP server, and {MU:3.9_GET VERSION}
access the RU or the FTP server from CLIENT PC-TOOL are available. To change over the displays it in the hospital list.
client PC to the ON-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Starts up the MUTL of the RU service
Refer to the following for details of procedures for changing over to the ON-LINE mode. MUTL {MU:3.10_MUTL}
utility.
{MU:3.27_OnLine}
Executes PING for the RU or the FTP
PING {MU:3.11_PING}
During the ON-LINE mode, the commands to directly access the FLASH ROM of the RU or server.
the FTP server, such as VERSION UP, UPLOAD of RU’s CONFIGURATION information are Displays the change of I/O statues of
MON {MU:3.12_MON}
executed. the RU.

Operation in the ON-LINE mode Checks the network connection with


FTP the RU and the operation of the FTP {MU:3.13_FTP}
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5
Conf gurat on(C) Ope at on(O)
server.
IP ADDRESS 172 16 1 10 VERSION UP EDI HIS ORY
VERSIONUP Updates the version of the RU
MUTL PING MON FTP EDIT CONFIGURATION EDIT CL NAME
VERSION UP {MU:3.14_VERSION UP}
HOSPITAL
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. 172.16.1.20
MUTL software.
PING
READ (MEDIA->CLIENT PC)
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )

Copies the maintenance information


ru1 ( 172.16.1.11 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )

MON
EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
WRITE (CLIENT PC->MEDIA)
UPLOAD edited in the OFF-LINE mode to the {MU:3.22_UPLOAD}
EXECUTE
UPLORD (CLIENT PC->FTP SERVER->RU)
FTP RU and the FTP server.
GET VERSION
EXECUTE
DOWNLORD (RU->FTP SERVER->CLIENT PC)
Copies the maintenance information of